Home

2010 Dodge Charger SRT8 Owner`s Manual

1. TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION 4 5 3x n RR REOR le 95 RH RUROR IRR RR CRUNC shies r IEA aca EAEren 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 cece ccc c cc cccccces 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE eee n la UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL eeesessecssecseccoecsecoecceccseeo 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 0 cece cece cece nce e ence eee hh EER hn nn 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 2c cece cece s ccc c cece EEKE hh hh hn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2 cece ccc cece ccc ccc cere cence cree eeeeeeeces 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ccc ccc c ccc c ccc r eee ehh i hn IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ccc cece ccc ccc e enese KERTA 10 DINE du UD o ian E ota he woe E S INTRODUCTION CONTENTS H Introduction enn 4 Vehicle Identification Number 6 E How To Use This Manual 4 Wi Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Bl Warnings And Cautions 0 6 4 INTRODUCTION EE INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and mainte
2. 293 W Tire Chains esee 281 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 293 Mi Snow Tires ulus RE 283 MMT In Gasoline 00 294 Materials Added To Fuel 294 238 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Fuel System Cautions 295 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 299 Carbon Monoxide Warnings 296 Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 299 a Addie Fuel uiioiewrias Moet dna 296 Overloading 12 22 99d ERERR Sd 300 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 296 Loading 23 md setae Ho o pote day des 300 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 298 W Trailer Towing s sellers 301 a Vehicle Loading ve 4e RR 298 W Recreational Towing Vehicle Certification Label aessa raas ggg Pend Motorhome EC Caste agas piane 201 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 239 STARTING PROCEDURES Automatic Transmission Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat before shifting into any driving gear belts CAUTION WARMING Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving ing precautions are not observed unattended children
3. 562 Overhead Console Reading Lamp 578 Visor Vanity Lamps 0 0 A6220 Glove Box Lamp 0 2 2 0 00 e eee 194 Door Courtesy oan vga eee oe YS 562 Shift Indicator Lamp JKLE14140 Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder 000 LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass cartridge types Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Bulb Number 9006 Exterior Low Beam Headlamp Standard Halogen Low Beam Headlamp High Intensity Discharge HID D15 Serviced at Authorized Dealer High Beam Headlamp 9005 Front Park Tum Lamp 3157A Front Fog Lamp If Equipped PSX24W Front Side Marker llle 194 Serviced at Authorized Dealer Tail Stop Lamp s seg 3 it ettet 3057 Tail Turn Lamp isses eese 3057 Rear Side Marker llle 168 Backup L mp eirette eeu eee eee 921 Center High Mount Stop Lamp CHMSL LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer License nid suede eb e xe ten ore ed 168 BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Park Turn Lamp and Front Side Marker Lamp Models with Halogen Headlamps 1 Open the hood NOTE Removal of t
4. 255 M Parking Brake uaosesoekvexk week or vues 256 ll Brake System Anti Lock Brake System ll Electronic Brake Control System Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Electronic Stability Program ESP Synchronizing ESP ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And ESP TCS Indicator Light li Tire Safety Information Tire Markings Tire Identification Number TIN 257 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 237 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 271 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 283 lal Tires General Information 275 Tire Rotation Standard Tires 284 Tire Pr SSUbe 11224993 20 diode tne ads dea ake 275 Tire Rotation All Season Tires 284 Tire Inflation Pressures 276 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 285 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 278 Premium System 6 ee ee ees 287 Radial Ply Tires llle 278 General Information 291 Tire Spinning Laus epe Re REOR 278 W Fuel Requirements Tread Wear Indicators 279 6l1L Engme wei Sie Rel ER eed Lite Of Vite uz sie isn eee See eae Pla es 280 Reformulated Gasoline 292 Replacement Tires de ayant ane rs 280 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends
5. Rear Window Defroster 149 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030407085 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle ee UNDERSTANDIN
6. eaae eee 348 Cruise Control Speed Control 136 Cruise Light 62er dob ad Pas 164 Cupholders iux bee ites ace hdd iG beat os 153 353 Customer Assistance 0000 eee eens 393 Daytime Brightness Interior Lights 131 Daytime Running Lights 4 128 Dealer Service qurusaini ERROR ERE 326 Deck Lid Emergency Release 36 Deck Lid Power Release 000 35 Defroster Rear Window 157 Defroster Windshield 74 231 Delay Intermittent Wipers 132 Diagnostic System Onboard 324 Dimmer Switch Headlight 129 Dipsticks Oil Engine Power Steering 406 INDEX ae Disabled Vehicle Towing senares 319 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 343 Eneine Ow ntes estare a oe ere Ree 330 Door LOCKS ct eee Eye ERA px 25 Door Locks Automatic lesen 27 Door Opener Garage eee 141 Driving On Slippery Surfaces liess 251 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 252 Electric Rear Window Defrost 157 Electric Remote Mirrors 00 84 Electrical Power Outlets 040 150 Electronic Brake Control System 260 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 136 Electronic Stability Program ESP 262 Electronic Throttle Control Warning L
7. 65 Aspect ratio in percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol Asymbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 270 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be fou
8. 332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in WARNING the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories m E contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands Battery Location after handling The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type vented ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333 CAUTION e It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post Battery posts are marked posi tive 4 and negative and are identified on the battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconn
9. ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons are located in the overhead console and contain one two or three dots lines desig nating the different HomeLink channels HomeLink Buttons NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener with out these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of th
10. rue REAR WINDOW WINDSHELD MASTER LIGHTING KEY ACTIVATE UPPER AND LOWER ier SEAT WINDOW LUFT THRE PRESSURE ar LENT WARNING PARN PARING INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH POWER OUTLET AIR OUTLET MONITOR M O o OC m Rmo 8G FUEL FILL SIDE REAR WINDOW WOORI WIR DONE UGHT FRONT FOG UGHT HOOD RELEASE LOWER AR RECIRCULATION CONVERTIBLE TRACTION ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTHLOCK WASHER FLUID LEVEL OUTLET 4 WINDOW DOWN CONTROL E SYSTEM eX GH C de Qt m 93 e VA awom srake T USFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE Ot REAR WINDOW ELECTRICALLY PARK UGHTS REAR FOG LAMP ANO UFTGATE DEFROST AND VENTILATING FAN WINDOW LOCK THROTTLE FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING DEFROST HEATED OPEN LOWER AIR OUTLET CONTROL DRIVE BRAKE fa TOW E b qp A a e c RE A mw BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTRUMENT PANEL SEATBELT SUDING DOOR oo AIR CONDITIONING m MAR RECOGNITION WARNING TOW HAUL CHARGING DEFROST RLUMINATION BUTTON vw e 9 Ny abet mad uw LOWER R GLOW PLUG POWER WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG AIRBAG SUDINO DOOR EMERGENCY UGHTER AND TRIMER FOR UCONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL STEERING FLUID AND WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE LOW srs EX C3 B Eua Ca ls t J RIRBRG FN si 2 PUSH fe MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL DOOR AJAR CONVERTIOLE CONVERTIBLE MORN SEE OWNERS Am ELECTRONIC INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM ARSAG O OFF TO DOWN Tor uP MANUAL 180 CONDITIONER STAB
11. WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Section 7 and follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph 9 Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated NOTE e Acontinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate 10 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for six to eight seconds 9 as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is either not on during starting or stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspected at your authorized dealer as soon as possible 11 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light will turn on and a single chime will T sound to warn of an overheated engine condition When this light turns on the engine temperature is critically hot The vehicle should be turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as possible 12 Electronic Stability Program ESP Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light e If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle
12. When ON is selected and the HEADLIGHT switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Section 3 Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 appears Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power WINDOW switches radio uconnect phone if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening
13. e Oil Pressure Shows the actual oil pressure e Tire Pressure Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire EXCLUDING THE SPARE TIRE Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of five lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to select English Espanol Deutsch Italiano or Francais Then as you continue the information will display in the selected language NOTE The EVIC will not change the uconnect lan guage selection Refer to the uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph 24 km h When ON is selected all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph 24 km h To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit When ON is selected all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened
14. in Section 4 To Lock the Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off Refer to Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 To Unlatch the Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk Using the Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph 24 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to be less than 35 ft 11 m from th
15. 12 Close the trunk MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 License Lamp 7 1 Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear fascia 2 Remove the bulb and socket assembly 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 1 License Lamp Bulb 2 Socket 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly 5 Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia and then install the screws 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 19 Gallons 72 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 6 1 Liter Engine SAE 5W 40 API Certified 7 Quarts 6 6 Liters Cooling System 6 1 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile 15 2 Quarts 14 4 Liters Formula or equivalent ncludes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operat ing conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 10725 and are approved to MB 229 3 or MB 229 5 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil
16. Full Off This mode is intended for off highway or off road use only and should not be used on any public roadways In this mode all TCS and ESP stability features are turned OFF To enter the Full Off mode press and hold the ESP OFF switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running After five seconds a chime will sound the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESP OFF message will display in the vehicle odometer Press and release the TRIP ODOM ETER button located on the instrument cluster to clear this message The ESP OFF message may appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 To turn ESP ON again momentarily press the ESP OFF switch NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved into the PARK position from any position other than PARK and then moved out of the PARK position This will occur when the message was previously cleared ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 WARNING In the ESP Full Off mode the engine torque reduction and stability features are cancelled There fore the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable NOTE When the ESP is switched OFF a feature of the system remains active This feature controls wheel spin across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential If one wheel on a
17. If the cut or puncture in the tire tread is approxi the Accessory Storage Compartment 8 for inflating mately 0 24 in 6 mm or larger sport balls rafts or like inflatable items However use only the Black Air Pump Hose 6 and make sure the Mode Select Knob 4 is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant into them The TIREFIT Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1 4 6mm diameter in the tread of your vehicle e Do not lift or carry TIREFIT kit by hoses e For optimum performance make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the TIREFIT kit If the tire has any sidewall damage If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire If the wheel has any damage Continued en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 309 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the e Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to wheel come in contact with hair eyes or clothing TIRE e Keep TIREFIT away from open flame or heat FIT is harmful if inhaled swallowed or absorbed source A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place provided Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
18. In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine OFF the brakes will still function The effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating Anti Lock Brake System The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up The electronic brake force distribution EBD prevents the rear wheels from over braking and provides greater control of available braking forces applied to the rear axle When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop The clicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations and ee START
19. cation and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefits of this system you must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated 262 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESP corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that
20. en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 There are different sizes and types of restraints for infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing children from newborn size to the child almost large by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg but are enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child less than one year old Both types of child restraints are seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to child LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward WARNING facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the infants in this position vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be Older Children and Child Restraints used either rearward facing or forward
21. provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Data parameters that are recorded Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Vehicle speed WARNING e Engine RPM In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could Brake switch status e Pedal position become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s Child Restraints size Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it e And other parameters depending on vehicle configuration
22. 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All uconnect Phonebook Entries e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The uconnect phone will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 List All Names in the uconnect Phonebook e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The uconnect phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the WS button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The uconnect phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the uconnect phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your
23. Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission transaxle axle etc for signs of con tamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 254 STARTING AND OPERATING EE WARNING e Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering cap
24. C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improp erly Refer to Section 6 for proper jump starting procedures and follow them carefully ee STARTING AND OPERATING 241 If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LO
25. Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 390 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN PE This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Vehicle 422b Lk RE yo Re ED 393 Speech Impaired TDD TTY 395 Prepare For The Appointment 393 Service Contract ivi ss EE REY eS 395 Prepare A List lleeese 393 W Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 396 Be Reasonable With Requests 393 W MOPAR Parts 00002000008 396 H If You Need Assistance 04 393 W Reporting Safety Defects 396 Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 394 In The 50 United
26. F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low 278 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h Radial Ply Tires WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident AI ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized tire dealer
27. General Information 113 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME ll Voice Recognition VR System If Equipped ise nee rrr Rete Voice Recognition VR System Operation Commands Voice Training ll Seats Power Seats Power Reclining Seats Lumbar Support Head Restraints Heated Seats Folding Rear Seat ll To Open And Close The Hood 113 B Lights jo a p bap eI Hop IV pe Pete od 126 Headlight Switch 00 126 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 127 Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only 127 Headlight Time Delay 127 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 128 Lights On Reminder 128 Fog Lights iae eae d 128 Multifunction Lever 2 ee eee 128 T m Signals cesset aretes rra teas 129 Lane Change Assist lille 129 High Low Beam Switch 129 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 137 Flash To Pass Overhead Console Map Reading Lights Interior Lights ll Windshield Wipers And Washers Intermittent Wiper System Mist Feature Windshield Washers Headlights On With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only Bi Tilt Telescoping Steering Column ll Adjustabl
28. If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The EVIC display will change from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the prog
29. Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 NOTE RECREATIONAL TOWING e Refer to the Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Sve cd a a dH Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the driveshaft is
30. REAR P195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa 29PSI 200kPa 29PSI INFLATION PR SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 4N109268 420kPa 60PSI A Tire and Loading Information Placard 811b5a9a STARTING AND OPERATING 271 This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires 272 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage a
31. To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Remote Key Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the flash lights on lock unlock feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until ON or OFF appears 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Headlights On with Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only
32. Using This Feature By using the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI 16 pin connector port e The iPod audio can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display e The iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to m Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector if supported by the specific iPod device Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod9 mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode iPod audio tracks if available from iPod start playing over the vehicle s audio system 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod automatically starts Play mode In Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track e Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list Turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track e Jump backward in the current trac
33. entertainment and programming for chil iPod in the vehicle can cause damage to the dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios m device and or to the connectors NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska WARNING System Activation Do not plug in or remove the iPod while driving Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you Failure to follow this warning could result in an may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio accident service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected P
34. in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button If the channel has been trained the EVIC display will now state CHANNEL TRANSMIT If the EVIC display still states CHANNEL TRAIN ING repeat Step 3 NOTE After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 6 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training
35. the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position To attach a child restraint tether strap 1 Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint Tether Strap Mounting 1 Cover 3 Attaching Strap A Tether Strap Hook B Tether Anchor 2 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 3 Attach the tether strap hook A of the child restraint to the anchor B and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN REC
36. 252 Wheel and Wheel Trim 005 350 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 350 Wind Buffeting 4 vier re ee kde eds 35 149 Window Fogging essel 233 WindOWS ua d Euer dob pede d io d 32 POW rT 2eeiceedemmRd es 4 ewe ed Lees we TS 32 Windshield Defroster llus 74 231 Windshield Washers 132 133 336 Fluid gs scan 4d 9 ead oe ed Oe aw Be bas 336 Windshield Wiper Blades 335 Windshield Wipers tate eu aa ani aa e c eae 132 Wiper Blade Replacement 335 Wiper Delay s neerRR EERERRRRRERECRPS 132 Wipers Intermittent llle 132
37. 260 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Anti Theft System 0 0 0 eee eee 171 Appearance Care 0 0 eee eee 348 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 17 Assistance Towing 0 ane Ean eee eee 99 Auto Down Power Windows 32 Auto Unlock Doors 0 00000 eee eee 28 Auto Up Power Windows sess 33 Automatic Dimming Mirror 82 en INDEX 403 Automatic Door Locks isses 27 28 Automatic Headlights liess 127 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 227 Automatic Transaxle Special Additives sses reses eae ceed s 348 Automatic Transmission 246 346 347 Adding Fluid 0 0 347 372 Autostick 22xkc 6x44 9 R RR REY ESN RE 249 Fluid and Filter Changes 347 Eluidi Change iua er ihr nens Re ee ws 347 Fluid Level Check 2 2 2 kn 346 Fluid Type cea e Rr ias 372 Shif ng soseta erap c ret Redux cea 246 Special Additives llis 348 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode 248 Autostick 2 30225 ke RRRUEPBRERESY e 249 Axle Fluid reyi leue on hae es Ces ER 372 Axle Lubrication Axle Fluid 372 Battery uude deeds acedXacex Peer ed deg 331 Emergency Starting es 315 Jump Starting 24604 ces In ns 315 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 21 Location 3 3 ER Ae eh Y Ey e ES 316 332 Belts Seat ia sea rack Rn dea RR d 38 74 Body Mechani
38. 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area in emergency situations when the cellular phone has network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect phone Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the amp button to begin If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the button and say Setup followed by Emergency e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The uconnect phone does slightly lower your chances e The towing assistance number dialed is based on the of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cellular phone directly country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Iowing Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too
39. Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse e When installing the power distribution center Fuse cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop 1 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw IOD erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so Yellow Cavity 1 of the Rear may allow water to get into the power distribution Power Distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system Center contains a black failure IOD fuse needed for vehicle processing during assembly The service replacement part is a 60 Amp yellow cartridge fuse When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it 2 40 Amp Integrated Power indicates a problem in the circuit that must be Green Module IPM corrected 3 mE 4 40 Amp Integrated Power Green Module IPM 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 5 30 Amp Heated Seats 13 Pink if equipped 14 10 Amp AC Heater Control 6 20 Amp Fuel Pump Red Cluster Security Yellow Module if equipped 7 20 Amp Sub Amp if equipped 15 Yellow 16 um 8 15 Amp Diagnostic Link Connec 17 20 Amp Cluster B
40. Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bi Mirrors Inside Day Night Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped Outside Mirrors Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Driver s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped Power Mirrors Heated Mirrors If Equipped en Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 84 connect phone If Equipped 85 Operation esce e dae 87 Phone Call Features 2 ee 95 uconnect phone Features 98 Advanced Phone Connectivity 103 Things You Should Know About Your uconnect phone 0000005 104
41. Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331 WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently sealed You will never have to add water nor is periodic maintenance required
42. Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs PLZTR5A 13 Gap 0 040 in 1 01 mm Fuel Selection Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or higher 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sa Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmis sion Fluid or equivalent Rear Axle MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent with MOPARe Friction Modifier Hypoid Gear Additive MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS lll Emissions Control System Maintenance 374 ll Maintenance Schedule Ls 374 Required Maintenance Intervals 376 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 374 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to prov
43. Hose Replacement 1 Uncoil the Clear Sealant Hose 7 2 Locate the rectangular Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area where you place your fingers to unlatch the hoses 6 7 from their storage area 3 Use the Yellow Cap on end of the Clear Sealant Hose 7 to depress the Sealant Bottle release button The Sealant Bottle 1 will pop up Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly 4 Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT hous ing 5 Position the new Sealant Bottle 1 to the housing so that the Clear Sealant Hose 7 aligns with the hose slot in the front of the housing and the alignment keys on the bottom of the bottle align with the alignment slots in the housing Then press the bottle into the housing An audible click will be heard indicating the bottle is locked in place 6 Verify the Yellow Cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Clear Sealant Hose 7 and return the hose to its storage area 7 Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the vehicle EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315 JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Continued Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it a a started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmis Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution that can sion cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could cause serious burns do not allow battery fluid to enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has contact eyes skin
44. Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer 396 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and
45. Ignition 13 To Disarm The System ww we eee 17 Key In Ignition Reminder 14 Mi Illuminated Entry System If Equipped 18 W Sentry Key tise ici ver been ch RR er ERR 15 W Remote Keyless Entry RKE 19 Replacement Keys 16 To Unlock The Doors 22 eee 19 Customer Key Programming 16 To Lock The Doors koges 20 General Information 0 16 To Unlatch The Trunk 0 21 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Using The Panic Alarm 21 W Trunk Lock And Release 2 eee nes 35 Programming Additional Transmitters 21 W Trunk Safety Warning 6 kc sa n 36 Transmitter Battery Service 21 Trunk Emergency Release 36 General Information sss 22 W Occupant Restraints i sss ens 37 lll Remote Starting System If Equipped 23 Lap Shoulder Belts 2 00 38 How To Use Remote Start 23 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 44 M Door Locks ee 25 Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Manual Door Locks 22222 RB 2224 25 Mose IH PU Dedcnnsier entente reese Bk T e uossrrz narius 26 Seat Belt Pretensioners 45 Child Protection Door Lock 29 ind ed ind 1 ue l mM 45 B Window
46. NEUTRAL 3 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 4 Using the screwdriver press and hold the override tab through the access port on the center console 7 Reinstall the override cover 246 STARTING AND OPERATING EEENEEEEEEEEMMMMMMMMMECC Five Speed Automatic Transmission Gear Ranges Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be PARK done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the This range supplements the parking brake by locking the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake Os care transmission The engine can be started in this range edal when moving the shift lever between these gears Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Shift Lever ee STARTING AND OPERATING 247 WARNING REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Use only Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the after the vehicle has come to a complete
47. Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The uconnect phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the uconnect phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The uconnect phone will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display
48. Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 383 il A 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule T Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter E T Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires N filter J If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner A J Rotate tires filter and replace if necessary N J Replace the air conditioning filter C LJ Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary E LJ Inspect the CV joints S M Inspect the exhaust system C Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for H damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary E D U L E S Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date 8 Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 384 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter I
49. Switch Headlight 128 129 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 266 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 165 Engine Temperature Warning 166 PXGTION ouo sue Sari RE AE cooganeds 75 In ae CP POI 128 168 Hazard Warning Flasher 304 Headlight Switeh gt sas saved ck eme tori 126 Headlights gees peas pamepet ienaa 126 364 Headlights On Reminder 128 Headlights On With Wipers 127 133 High Beam 22s ees ec ake ieee ean 129 168 High Beam Indicator 000 168 High Beam Low Beam Select 129 Illuminated ENY 4 osc ais ca eae ee aoe 18 Instrument Cluster 000005 126 164 Intensity Control 0 000000 000 131 Interior zcuaemeseewete eed ubt 130 140 License ora eda Beka Hho o eR EEG RS 369 Lights On Reminder lesu 128 Low Euel izusaccex ded REY cae es 173 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 173 Map Reading 00004 130 140 Oil Pressure 44 s40 haa ak ware eee avec eave 167 Parade Mode Daytime Brightness 131 Passing ksgeoeSa e Or desa Oe RR ROS S Rea 130 Reading sue reete ee 130 140 Seat Belt Reminder lille 168 412 INDEX ae S rVlOE ysa parse ER Sad a ue doa YHP aig 361 362 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 173 Tire Pressure Monitoring IPMS 171 285 Traction Control 0 0 0 0 00 cee eee 266 Turn Signa
50. TIREFIT Usage Precautions e Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle 1 and sealant hose Selecting Air Mode 7 prior to the expiration date printed on the bottle T Turn the Mode Select knob 4 to this position label to assure optimum operation of the system Refer Using the Mode Select Knob and Hoses for air pump operation only Use the Black Air to Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT section F Sealant Pump Hose 6 when selecting this mode Bottle and Hose Replacement e The sealant bottle 1 and sealant hose 7 is a one tire application use After each use always immediately replace these components at an authorized dealer Selecting Sealant Mode S Turn the Mode Select knob 4 to this position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant and to inflate the tire Use the Sealant Hose Clear hose with the e When the TIREFIT Sealant is in a liquid form clean Yellow Cap 7 when selecting this mode water and a damp cloth will remove the material from 308 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME the vehicle or tire and wheel components Once the sealant dries it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded e Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle close to traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the TIREFIT kit Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the e You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle following circumstances tires The kit also comes with two needles located in
51. This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to
52. V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the uconnect phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work cellular or pager that you wish to edit
53. affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Remember more frequent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to performing the tire rotation 284 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Rotation Standard Tires Tire Rotation All Season Tires The suggested rotation method is the side to side as The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped shown in the following diagram with all season tires is the forward cross as shown in 7 the following diagram ER 7e E 055705379 055703771 Tire Rotati Tire Rotation ire Rotation ee STARTING AND OP
54. ai behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window These tether strap anchorages are under a plastic cover with this symbol on it Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward NOTE facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seatcover material Then rotate the tether anchorage cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor age being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the
55. airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser vice If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accesso ries may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabili ties contact your authorized dealer 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in a collision While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON e The light remains on after
56. are also labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Airbag Warning Light e Driver Front Airbag e Front Passenger Airbag e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel e Knee Impact Bolster e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners if equipped e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC if equipped Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the impact sensors at the front of the car 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires airbag deployment The timing of the second stage determines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet the need the remaining gas in the inflator is expended WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the airbag
57. be seated and using the proper restraint system 030907108 Folding Rear Seats ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety Two latches must be released to open the hood catch to the left The safety catch is located under the 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side center front edge of the hood of the instrument panel ps 031305159 Hood Safety Catch Use the hood prop rod if equipped to secure the hood in the open position Hood Release Lever 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approxi mately 6 in 15 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving LIGHTS Headlight Switch rs the instrument panel This switch controls the operation of the headlights parking lights instrument panel lights instrument panel light dimming interior lights and fog lights Headlight Switch Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and inst
58. be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME CAUTION e
59. being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather 045605184 Automatic Temperature Controls Automatic Operation The Dual Zone Climate Control System automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operation of the system is quite simple Begin by turning the mode control knob on the right to AUTO and place the blower control knob on the left to either LO AUTO or HI AUTO The LO AUTO position should be used for front seat occupants only The HI AUTO position should be used when more airflow is desired or when rear seat occupants are present Then dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver or passenger temperature control knob Once the comfort level is selected the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system Should the de sired comfort level require air conditioning the system will aut
60. buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued WARNING Continued A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron gest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if itis too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision Removing Slack from Belt WARNING A lap belt worn too high can increase the r
61. cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the uconnect phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the uconnect phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the amp button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The uconnect phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second
62. complete the pairing process you will need to reference your cellular phone Owner s Manual The uconnect website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing The following are general phone to uconnect phone pairing instructions e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the uconnect phone a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your uconnect phone However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your uconnect phone The priority allows the uconnect phone to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the
63. control to Defrost Floor amp or pin Defrost S as needed Adjust Fan and Temperature control for comfort 1352266 O a STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures oss e Rn 239 W Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission 239 General Information Normal Starting Tip Start 240 Key Ignition Park Interlock Extreme Cold Weather Brake Transmission Shift Interlock Below 20 F Or 29 C 0 0040 240 DYStEML e Gli souri i Ge bue deb P RUP ed If Engine Fails To Start 0 240 Brake Transmission Interlock Manual After Starting isses eese 241 E sudare gute ant aati Bl Engine Block Heater If Equipped 241 Five Speed Automatic Transmission Gear Ranges 236 STARTING AND OPERATING ME M Autostick losses esr RR RECS 249 Operation cede eri eye RECS Le 250 General Information 250 E Driving On Slippery Surfaces 251 Acceleration selle 251 TraGUORk uus deb CIE Re dam 251 E Driving Through Water 2 2 wee 252 Flowing Rising Water 252 Shallow Standing Water 252 a Power Steering icdexkRRER Rx e Res 254 Power Steering Fluid Check
64. e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a cellular and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the u button while the uconnect phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you enter the name the uconnect phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work cellular pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted
65. fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of fil
66. flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the multifunction lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the multifunction lever is released Overhead Console Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console Each light is turned on by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent 8125e174 Overhead Console Interior Lights The interior lights come on when a door is opened To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 because a door is open This includes the glove box light but not the trunk light To restore interior light operation ei
67. for radial tire repairs Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck STARTING AND OPERATING 279 WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed m 055007576 Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires 1 Worn Tire to help you in determining when your tires should be 2 New Tire replaced These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced 280 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have
68. front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter OCO CO C O C O L Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 387 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service 126 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule T Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil J Rotate tires filter J If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner T Rotate tires filter and replace if necessary T Inspect the rear axle fluid Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system O O O O O Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 388 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 1
69. iPod Preset 1 Playlists Preset 2 Artists Preset 3 Albums Preset 4 Genres Preset 5 Audiobooks Preset 6 Podcasts Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line e To Exit List mode without selecting a track press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the iPod then you can follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your iPod ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 uconneci studios SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN RER RES RADIOS ONLY Leaving the iPod or any supported device any Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to alter the operation or damage the device Follow coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite the device manufacturer s guidelines Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music Placing items on the iPod or connections to the Sports news
70. in a vehicle is dangerous for a e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other controls or move the ve hicle Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 240 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Normal Starting Tip Start NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29
71. is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Lumbar Support This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support Turn the control lever for ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support Power Seat Recline Switch ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the large button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Lumbar Support Control Lever Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event of a rear impact The head restraint should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is located above the top of Adjustable Head Restraint your ear 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To remove the head restraint pull upward on the head To install the head restraint insert the head restraint rods restraint to its highest position push in both buttons at into each guide apply pressure down on the headrest the base of each head restraint rod and simultaneously until the head restraint reaches the first lock position pull up on the head restraint push the large button in and push down and adjust head restraint to desired position NOTE Ensure
72. is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tions Remove and store the extender when not needed 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 81cb24f3 Front Airbag Components 1 Airbags 2 Knee Bolsters NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a win dow If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags they are located above the side windows and their covers
73. its per formance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e To avoid contamination from foreign matter or e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Check Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not required For this reason the dipstick is omitted nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a accident Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction have the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 CAUTIO
74. keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se MPEG Specification Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will
75. lever in PARK and cycle the ignition key The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required In this case you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing Also have the system checked by an authorized dealer if the light does not come on during starting UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 8 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads 240 F 116 C or greater pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range 200 230 F 93 110 C If the pointer remains at 240 F 116 C or greater and you hear a chime turn the engine OFF immediately and call for service 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME
76. light will turn off WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired push the lever downward to SET DECEL and release Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE e Electronic Speed Control will only function in 3rd 4th or 5th gear when in the Autostick mode if equipped e The Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a different size tire is installed on one wheel such as the compact spare tire 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Deactivate The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without erasing the memory if you e Softly tap the brake pedal e Press the brake pedal e Pull the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you CANCEL Pushing and releasing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition OFF erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h you can resume the previous set speed To do so push the lever upward to RESUME ACCEL and release Then remove your foot from the acce
77. manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash fo
78. may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING e DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Power Seats WARNING The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the driver s seat Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is up or down forward or rearward or to recline the dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could seatback The passenger s seat will move up or down cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be forward or rearward properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat as it may cause damage to the seat controls Power Seat Switch 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Power Reclining Sesta warner O WARNING The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the seat Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt
79. mile 1 4 mile e The feature will ready when the vehicle is at 0 mph 0 km h The word READY will flash when condi tions are met for the event to begin e Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1 8 mile 1 4 mile in less then 30 seconds e The time and speed will continue to display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed e Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run and display the vehicle s best 1 8 mile 1 4 mile run 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e To clear the vehicle s best 1 8 mile 1 4 mile run press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for five seconds Instantaneous G Force When selected this screen displays the current G Force longitudinal and lateral along with a friction circle that displays the directions of the forces Peak G Force When selected this screen displays all four G force values two longitudinal and two lateral e When a force greater than zero is measured the display will update the value as it climbs As the G Force falls the peak forces will continue to display e Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the peak force values Digital Speedometer When selected this screen displays vehicle speed and records top speed e Press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for three seconds to toggle between current speed and top speed e To reset top speed quickly press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button whe
80. minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Open ing either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 Sunroof Fully Closed Press the power sunroof switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M mes ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 Volt DC electrical power outlets on this vehicle Both of the power outlets are protected by a fuse Insert cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power outlets for use to ensure proper operation NOTE e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts The 12 Volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray has power available only when the ignition is in the ON or ACC positions Front Power Outlet WARNING Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on the center console on vehicle s not equipped with the ash receiver tray A fire leading to bodily injury could result es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 The center console outlet is powered directly from the WARNING battery power available at all times Items plugged into this outlet may discharge the battery and or pr
81. or clothing Wear safety glasses started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If and protect your eyes at all times If acid splashes the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may HE YOR eyes ek on your skin flush contaminated be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type area immediately with large quantities of water of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam this procedure carefully mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away WARNING Failure to follow these warnings could result in personal injury or death from the vent holes Do not lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source that has a greater than 12 Volt system i e do not use a 24 Volt power source The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be Continued replaced with a battery of the same type vented e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by the fan 316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Ss NOTE The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump starting 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watchbands or bracelets that might m
82. or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the TPM sensor ee STARTING AND OPERATING 287 NOTE e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure the tire or condition Premium System e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless while adjusting your tire pressure technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the stopping ability tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte
83. possibly result in an electrical system Natural Module PCM failure 25 Amp Ignition Run Start When replacing a blown fuse it is important to Natural use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating 25 Amp Alternator The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated Natural may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it 25 Amp Ignition Coils Injectors indicates a problem in the circuit that must be Natural corrected 30 Amp Starter Green 9 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 10 30 Amp Windshield Wiper 15 50 Amp Radiator Fan Pink Red 11 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake System 16 Pink ABS Valves 17 12 40 Amp Radiator Fan 18 m Green 19 m 13 50 Amp Anti Lock Brake System 5 na Red ABS Pump Motor 21 14 22 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Rear Power Distribution Center There is also a power distribution center located in the trunk under the spare tire access panel This center contains fuses and relays S es 000 812da393 Rear Power Distribution Center 81344fb9 Opening the Access Panel ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 CAUTION
84. practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 400 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessi
85. problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 The term IC before the certification registration num WARNING ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi cations were met e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED nU tended children can become entrapped by the The power sunroof switch is located between the sun power sunroof while operating the power sunroof visors on the overhead console switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure al
86. rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program e or puce None Adult Hits Adlt Hit Classical Classicl Classic Rock Cls Rock College College Country Coun
87. seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belts The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch ing latch plates or Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip Pulling up on the s
88. section Um Child Lock Contro 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door NOTE When the Child Protection Door Lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position WARNING Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the child protection locks are engaged Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death NOTE e After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock sys tem always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e For emergency exit with the system engaged move the door lock plunger to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door system NOTE After disengaging the Child Protection Door 1 Open the rear door Lock system always test the door from the inside to 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or alike into the Wake ceket OPUS mm We Ges ed postin child lock control and pull it downward Child Lock Control 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door control all the door windows Power Window Sw
89. side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the
90. spark plug wires ignition switch is in the ON position disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic You or others can be badly burned by hot engine testing or for prolonged periods during very rough coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If idling or malfunctioning operating conditions you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot 340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant a
91. such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the uconnect phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using uconnect phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the uconnect phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The uconnect phone will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the uconnect phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the uconnect phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the uconnect phone e Press the amp button e Following the beep say Mute In order to
92. system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufac turer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion 204 STARTING AND OPERATING ME To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter disconne
93. take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button a
94. that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If itis necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the p
95. that the front of the head restraint is facing toward the front of the vehicle WARNING Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision The head restraints should always be checked prior to operating the vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Always adjust the head restraints when the Removing Head Restraint vehicle is in PARK 030907586 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Heated Seats This feature heats the front driver passenger and second row seats The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel After turning the ignition ON you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for High one for Low and none for Off Press the switch once to select High level heat ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off If High level heating is selected the system will auto matically switch to the Low level after 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of indi cators illuminated changes from two to one indicating the change Operation on the Low level setting also turns off automatically after 30 minutes NOTE Once a heat setting is selected he
96. the approximate six to eight second interval e The light comes on and remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment if applicable and up to a quarter second of either high speed deceleration data or change in velocity during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and is otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Ch
97. the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Section 7 and follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph TIREFIT KIT Small punctures up to V4 6 mm in the tire tread can be sealed with TIREFIT Foreign objects e g screws or nails should not be removed from the tire TIREFIT can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately 4 F 20 C This kit will provide a temporary tire seal allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles 160 km with a maximum speed of 55 mph 88 km hr 306 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES TIREFIT Storage TIREFIT Kit Components and Operation The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk 81aced9c ET 1 Sealant Bottle TIREFIT Location 2 Pressure Gauge 3 Power Button 4 Mode Select Knob WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 307 5 Power Plug and Cable Using the Power Button Push and release the button 3 once to turn 6 Ait Pump Hose Black ON the TIREFIT kit Push and release the 7 Sealant Hose Clear with Yellow Cap button 3 again to turn OFF the TIREFIT kit 8 Accessory Storage Compartment
98. to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF SALES CODE RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate 042305233 RES RSC Radio es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audi
99. training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the uconnect phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the WS button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the S button and say the Setup Voice Train ing command ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the e Speak normally without pausing just as you would uconnect phone For best results the Voice Training speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from session should be completed when the vehicle is parked you with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period EC This procedure may be repeated with a new user The PS e Performance is maximized under system will adapt to the last trained voice only si low to medium bl ti To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default FIBER mecit Blovrer seiling settings enter the Voice Training session via the above e low to medium vehicle speed procedure and follow the prompts E notes Voice Recognition VI e smooth road surface e For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e dry weather condition e fully closed windows e Always wait for the beep before speaking 1
100. 06 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the uconnect phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and uconnect phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O for 0 zero e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e Ina convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness Bluetooth Communication Link to a larg
101. 292 Ethanol 5 x E RERCG CY ald 293 Filler Cap Gas Cap 6 2 2 0 0000200000 296 Gasoline ise senses ed Bane 85 Ge do ee d 292 GaSe sso gue dues arre ie e s Saba E 164 Materials Added ssc cce esitise asais 294 Methanol icut ete ded brick dura indes 293 Octane Rating 2 2ecco er err 292 371 Requirements oces pe ke ee ae De S RR 292 Specifications 2 ia k2sde ve wel ane a ea wa EROR 371 Tank Capacity see acre i hee dee ko 370 Fuel System Caution 0 0 0 000 mires 297 Fueling 2 2 or Rb awh ERE RE 296 BUSES DUET 353 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 141 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 296 324 Gasoline Clean Air lees 292 Gasoline Fuel leeren 292 Gasoline Reformulated iss 292 Gauges Coolant Temperature 04 165 Fuel weet a caw wed ab goed Paden Face des 164 Speedometer sucks aede RICE Ue eps 164 en INDEX 409 Tachometer veri RE em ae ow 164 General Information 16 22 113 250 291 General Maintenance 0000050 327 Glass Cleaning cies Dikan thie Se Rl ct 352 Gross Axle Weight Rating 299 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 299 GVWR 4i ire Eo Eas PAA SE patats 299 Hands Free Phone uconnect 85 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water 252 Hazard Warning Flasher 5 304 Head Restraints cs cs cerises seriens i
102. 38 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 389 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or Schedule 150 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule a 2 Rotate tires Change the engine oil and engine oil J If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles Inspect the CV joints equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing L Rotate tires LI LI LI O O C O C L M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order
103. 3e eet can ee asia a 83 Heated eicere tmerret 9 PILAE EE S 84 Outside 525 7 hs dh os eats asd 82 Re rvlew seeded bee fe Rh PSEA eg 81 Vanity ann sess ae a eee dnd oS hee dos ea c 84 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 285 Mopar Pattoni Putat ee Ye dene aos 326 396 MIBE ETBE 231 a ee agli age RE RR 293 Multi Function Control Lever 128 New Vehicle Break In Period 71 Occupant Restraints 000 37 54 57 Occupant Restraints Sedan 50 54 56 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 292 371 Odometer 23 db Redes d urs E V d Ree 164 ji p UTC EG 164 Oil Change Indicator lt p onses a eaaa aea Eia 178 Oil Change Indicator Reset 178 Oil Engine Lem Rer EET akisi 328 371 Capacity six neget ade eS 370 Change Interval si hq 4 eee es 329 Checking petoen spenni pa Rer depen 328 Dipstick o ceses meanrat REPRE PES 328 Disposal issu et v bee dob bea dio ds 330 Filtet ism cx eter tsk eek 330 371 Filter Disposal 00000000000 330 Materials Added to llle 330 Recommendation 329 370 SYDEDUG 54 aie apie se RA HEU aie ae he aes 329 VISCOSHY xs Renn ae eR eS 329 370 Oil Filter Change s esee e ee teed EE 330 Oil Filter Selection llle 330 Onboard Diagnostic System 324 325 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 141 Operating Pr
104. 8 376 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 377 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires J If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary ood Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authori
105. AINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 The most common causes are e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect e Road salt dirt and moi a lation n KS ij and moisture accuntulatic your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint EE E e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing Insects tree sap and tar that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants CAUTION Washing Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild melal anid painted ou ee car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve Special Care e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open e If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner e If y
106. Appearance Care 0005 351 Interior Lights 6 2 ee 130 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 132 Introduction 6 2 0 0 0 0 00 ierra ndara 4 Jump Starting 22 cuss vwea ees ua haee 315 Key Programming 25 2 ue 9 eR e 16 Key Replacement passrrand sorsra uas qure 16 Key Sentry Immobilizer lille 15 Key In Reminder 42e sdb ee ree d ne 14 Keyless Entry System eec cece 0 0 000002 e eee 19 KEYS xunpexcone x een wee ee RIS RR ee acie 12 Kicker Sound System 0 000000 0 224 Knee Bolster llle 48 49 Lane Change and Turn Signals 129 Lane Change Assist sasaw siui 00000000 eee 129 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 000 38 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren 66 67 Latch Plate sens isene exe ee ie 40 Latches oe sse Re n e ets 75 Hood iebe4 eR RR age cas 125 Lead Free Gasoline 0 0 eee isegi 292 Leaks Fluid oe eae ke RO Re 75 Lite of Dites m c RR PSs Sod Sandals S 280 Light Bulbs sereta thk o prr dri erar de 75 361 Lights 5 sue enc ee E eds 75 126 AIDE scs aere Renee cens 49 55 60 74 166 Ant Lock 2e re Rx 172 260 Automatic Headlights 127 Brake Assist Warning 266 Brake Warning uus eene RERO coke 169 258 Bulb Replacement 000 361 362 Courtesy Reading lille 130 140 CHUISE 2s uoce Re dk ae ee RUE CR Tei 164 Daytime Running llle 128 Dimmer
107. CK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle It has a removable cap that is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up 242 STARTING AND OPERATING ME AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WARNING CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally a
108. ELEASE The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel NOTE The transmission must be in PARK before the button will operate 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter twice within five seconds 81ac2f d7 Trunk Release Button With the ignition switch in the RUN position the Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key removed from the ignition switch the Trunk Open sym bol will display until the trunk is closed trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke Trunk Emergency Release The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency release handle It is located on the inside of the trunk lid near the latch and is coated so that it glows in
109. ERATING 285 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to the Tires General Informa tion in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitori
110. Feature 57 Entry System Illuminated 18 EANO 5 ze e sod a Ee re ce re eoque 293 Exhaust Gas Caution 00 73 296 337 Exhaust System soins deat de em br e des 73 337 Exterior Folding Mirrors estiss assieta 83 Exterior Lighting i e Rep ha 126 Exterior Lights iiem endet eed eR es 75 Filler Location Fuel 00000000 296 Filters Air Cleaner leen 330 Air Conditioning sess 233 334 Engine Oil sas cag a tae ERES 330 371 Engine Oil Disposal lesus 330 Flashers Hazard Warning 0 6 2 0 000 cece eee 304 T rn Signal sre Res cR 75 129 166 Flash To Pass llle 130 Flooded Engine Starting 240 Floor Console 0 00 ee eee 154 Fluid Brake eee 372 Fluid Capacities 5s 3 ace ed re eee 370 Fluid Leaks ssaa d RR Red 75 408 INDEX ee Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 346 Drake 202 23 2660 4 08s ud ed RS Ra EI Pd 345 Cooling System gegrens E a ea a 340 Engine Oil cea teen GPa ee hekia 328 Power Steering swa Kala o RR RS 255 FIAS ecc ace Sak PME ERE 371 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 371 Fog LICKS ees keect e e mes 128 168 Folding Rear Seat 1 6 eee 124 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 004 318 Fuel s ivag niiaad b Rex REG eee a EGG ex 292 Addimg eese Er ERE V i 296 Additives sss ses re o a e ees 294 Clean Ait zac ER Rb ERRARE EUR
111. G THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 WARNING Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged The Vehicles and other objects seen in the passengerside hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to convex mirror will look smaller and farther away resist damage The hinge has three detent positions full than they really are Relying too much on your forward full rearward and normal passenger side convex mirror could cause you to privers Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror If mE collide with another vehicle or other object Use your p quipped indue di when judging the in sistance of a The driver s outside mirror will automatically adjust for vehicle seen in the passenger Side convex mirror glare from vehicles behind you This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside mirror The mirror will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Power Mirrors After selecting a mirror move the knob in the same The power mirror switch is located on the driver s door direction you want the mirror to move Use the center off trim panel next to the power door lock switch A rotary position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror knob selects the left mirror right mirror or off position position Mou MIN OMM OR R
112. H Air is directed to the windshield through the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Defrost Floor Me Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets and the outlets at the base of the windshield Air is also directed to the front door windows through the side window demister grilles e Floor Air flows through the floor outlets located under the instrument panel and into the rear seating area through vents under the front seats UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 e Bi Level Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel and through the outlets located on the floor Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Panel gt gt Air flows through the outlets located in the instru ment panel Air flows through the registers in the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers These registers can be closed to block airflow e Air Conditioning Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only When the air con ditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with the mode control dial Press this button a second time to turn off the air 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se conditioning An indicator in t
113. HECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received in cluding interference that may cause undesired operation 202 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow ing licenses Bb RAE Beta po do B ede KR55120123 2671 5120123 United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS 6 1L Engine The 6 1
114. ILITY CONTROL OFF 010507683 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel The VIN is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title 010805185 ama narii VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN en INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS i Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS BA Word About Your Keys icu mer 12 W Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped 17 Wireless Ignition Node WIN 12 Rearming Of The System 2 wwe 17 Key FOB usce kem ee ee 13 To rm The System oss os rm nn 17 Removing Key FOB From
115. ING AND OPERATING 259 e Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end WARNING Continued of the stop e The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING e The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisti cated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 260 STARTING AND OPERATING ME All vehicle wheels and tires m
116. If Equipped Lift the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the AUTO up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way lift the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Open ing either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual NOTE e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim Window Lockout Switch pa
117. L engine is designed to meet all m 4 emissions regulations and provide excel 9 1 lent fuel economy and performance when using high quality premium unleaded 800dfab amp gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or higher RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel
118. N e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than that recommended by the manufacturer will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your authorized dealer immediately Severe damage to the transmission may occur Your au thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals If the transmission is disassembled for any reason the fluid and filter should be changed Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant may be used 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Sp
119. NOT tow an AWD vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground unless the rear driveshaft is removed and the transmission is in NEUTRAL Vehicles WITHOUT AWD may be towed with rear wheels on the ground with the transmission in NEU TRAL under the following conditions e The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles 24 km e The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph 48 km h 320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Do not tow the vehicle from the rear Damage to the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur Exceeding these towing limits may cause transmis sion failure e Do not push or tow this vehicle with another Vehicles equipped with AWD can be towed with the vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans transmission in NEUTRAL and the rear wheels OFF the mission may result ground or the rear driveshaft removed with no limita tion on speed or distance If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the key must be in the ON position CAUTION not the ACC position Make certain the transmission e Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front remains in NEUTRAL with sling type towing equipment Damage to the front fascia will rasult Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this vehicle on a tow dolly Vehicle damage may occur If the transmission is not
120. OMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory isa SAFETY TIPS high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are AREA shown in Engine Oil under Maintenance Procedures WARNIG o in section 7 a this manual NON DETERGENT OR WARASE STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Transporting Passengers A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
121. ORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION e Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended e For vehicles equipped with Keyless Go always remember to place the ignition in OFF At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer Customer Key Programming Programming of Key Fobs and their RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 e This device must accept any interference that may be receiv
122. Operation severe oa seg i eh rn ae AS a 227 ee INDEX 415 Radio Remote Controls lilius 225 Radio Satellite uconnect studios 219 Rear Cupholdet 544i kA ERES 153 Rear Seat Folding cn sk a sen 124 Rear Window Defroster llle 157 Rear Window Features 000000 ee 157 Rearview Mirrors 0 00002 cece eee 81 Reclining Front Seats 000 0000 120 Recreational Towing 0000005 301 Reformulated Gasoline 0005 292 Reirigerant 2 14 2 ots daces tre dambl once 334 Release Hood 1 ce eee 125 Reminder Lights On 0000 128 Reminder Seat Belt 000 0 e eee 45 Remote Control Starting System ss osa xr ea es 23 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 0 19 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 225 Remote Starting System 000000000 23 Remote Trunk Release 00 0 35 Replacement Bulbs senist draai asp ipa as 361 Replacement Keys ose b ERR E 16 Replacement Parts 326 Replacement Tires ece sio eae x ye eed e eges 280 Reporting Safety Defects esasa caasa draai 396 Restraint Head 0 1 eee 121 Restraints Child llle 62 Restraints Occupant 00000 37 Rocking Vehicle When Stuck 318 Rotation Tires 85464 4 446 4658 EYE EG 283 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 74 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 75 Safet
123. Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the uconnect phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The uconnect phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the uconnect phone from idle simply press the amp button and follow the audible prompts for directions All uconnect phone sessions begin with a press of the amp button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link uconnect phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your uconnect phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To
124. RES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME uconnect phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The uconnect phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile cellular phone uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station so uconnect phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s uconnect phone The uconnect phone allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death Phone Button Depending on the vehicle options either the Ko radio or the mirror will contain the two control Voice Recognition Button buttons amp phone button and t voice recognition button that will enable you to access the system e Actual button location may vary wi
125. START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When re leased from the START position the switch automatically returns to the ON position Wireless Ignition Node WIN 1 LOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON 4 START E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead The emergency key is also for locking the glove box You can keep the emergency key with you when valet park ing To remove the emergency key from the Key Fob slide the mechanical latch at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out of the Key Fob with your other hand 020207467 Emergency Key Removal NOTE You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinders with either side up Removing Key Fob From Ignition Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the key to the LOCK position and then remove the Key Fob 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE WARNING e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch is tur
126. States And Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 394 WS CS het ata ta Sete aes In Mexico Contact 1 0 00 00 ee eee 394 PCO voee duae nee Tele icona ll Publication Order Forms 392 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Traction Grades 00000 eee 399 Q ality Grades cie a dun ale RE ahd 399 Treadwe ar sess 4 4 4g asatetach se Gian Mi adete E 399 Temperature Grades 00 400 EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 393 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal dai
127. This feature allows you to plug an iPod into the vehicle s sound system through a 16 pin connector using the provided interface cable UCI supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the UCI features Please visit Apple s web site for software updates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port connecting an iPod to this port does not play the media For playing an iPod use the separate 16 pin connector port in the glove compartment on some vehicles e Connecting an iPod to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the UCI feature to control the connected device ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Connecting The iPod Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s 16 pin connector port which is located in the glove compartment on some vehicles Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s UCI system iPod may take a few seconds to connect the iPod starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE e You may have to remove the connector pin protection cap from the 16 pin connector port prior to connect ing the cable e If the iPod battery is completely discharged it may not communicate with the UCI system until a mini mum charge is attained Leaving the iPod connected to the UCI system may charge it to the required level
128. UE sate m Heated Mirrors If Equipped l These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in this section for further information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light turns on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the light Power Mirror Control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 Illuminated Vanity Mirror uconnect phone IF EQUIPPED uconnect phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system uconnect phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands eg Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the uconnect phone NOTE The uconnect phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the uconnect website for supported phones For uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATU
129. VEHICLE 345 WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system failure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap Add fluid to bring the level up to the MAX mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require ments described on the brake fluid reservoir With disc brakes fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type WARNING e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair
130. Your Vehicle For Safety 72 Checks Safety ec csccee oom c3 e edo a dee e 72 Child Restraint as een 62 63 64 67 69 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 66 67 Child Safety Locks 6 llle 29 Clean Air Gasoline scel eme 292 Cleaning Wheels uses bk xe etat OPER 350 Windshield Wiper Blades 335 Climate Control sae ccs eee beset eva 227 ROCK x ie iba seus Soa ais bep paa peg ord 192 195 204 Com Holder sLk 9 RERO 154 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 226 COMPASS io esae eade OR RR Oa ee SR RN 184 Compass Calibration iile 185 Compass Variance ide rr RR ae abe dea 185 nn INDEX 405 Computer Trip Travel 0040 179 Connector WCW EET ee AN 214 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 214 Console Flom rene tu es 154 Console Overhead iles 140 Contract Service ee 395 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 342 Cooling System 1 eee 339 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 341 Coolant Capacity 0 0 02 e ae 370 Coolant Level 0 0 0 0 0 eee eae 340 343 Disposal of Used Coolant 343 Drain Flush and Refill 340 lnspecti n ii e em e I4 ERR IREES 343 Points to Remember 000005 343 Pressure Cap oca icc doeet de Meee 342 Radiator Cap s ise tre eb des 342 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 340 370 371 Corrosion Protection
131. a darkened trunk Pull on the handle to open the trunk E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Trunk Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passen gers e Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window if equipped e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
132. a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min 10 min 30 min or 60 min appears E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the uconnect system are confirmed To make your selec tion press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Turn by Turn Navigation If Equipped When ON is selected the Turn by Turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig nated turn within a programmed route To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Display Units of Measure in The EVIC odometer and uconnect gps if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until ENGLISH or MET RIC appears SALES CODE RER REN AM FM CD DVD RADIO IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN and RER radios contain a CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navi
133. ability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering ee STARTING AND OPERATING 255 system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho ri
134. ains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors Vehicles with Full Size Spare 1 The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS 2 If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON In addition the EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic showing the low tire pressure value flashing 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires Vehicles with Compact Spare 1 The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle the TPM Telltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound In addition the graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a C
135. airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equipped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC Airbags depending on severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The airbag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Ad ditional sensor
136. ake an inadvertent electrical contact 2 When boost is provided by a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but do not allow the vehicles to touch one another WARNING Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result 3 Set the parking brake place the automatic transmis sion in PARK and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position on both vehicles 4 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal loads 5 Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote jump start positive battery post in the engine com partment Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Refer to the following illustration for jump starting connections 6 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery Make sure you have WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317 a good contact on the ground Refer to the following WARNING illustration for jump starting connections e You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing or towing Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode During cold weather when temperatures are be low the freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may fre
137. alfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level in the SAFE range Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 I of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE range will result in an oil level at the top of the SAFE range on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329 Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for information on this system NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the requirements of Chrysler Material St
138. an damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products Interior Care Use MOPAR Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and MOPAR Carpet Cleaner or equivalent for carpeting Interior trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth or MOPAR Satin Select or equivalent Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather cond
139. an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 281 WARNING WARNING Continued e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having that specified for your vehicle Some combinations adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus failure and loss of vehicle control pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in chan
140. andard MS 10725 and are approved to MB 229 3 or MB 229 5 will be listed on the back label of the oil container CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 0W 40 or SAE 5W 40 engine oil is preferred for use in all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in this section Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed 330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Materials Added to Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil
141. arting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions e Avoid using speed control when Autostick is en gaged e The transmission will automatically shift up when maximum engine speed is reached while Autostick is engaged e Transmission shifting will be more crisp abrupt when Autostick is engaged DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear driving wheels wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precau tions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 252 STARTING AND OPERATING EE 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle i
142. as possible Adapt your speed and es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 driving to the prevailing road conditions and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP 13 Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake Assist System BAS Malfunction Indicator Light The yellow Electronic Stability Program ESP ESP Brake Assist System BAS malfunction indica BAS tor light will turn on when the key in the ignition switch is turned to the ON position The light should go out with the engine running If the light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected WARNING If a warning light remains on the system may not be working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or BAS Under certain driving conditions where ESP or BAS would be beneficial you if you have not adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to account for the lack of the feature may be in acci dent 14 Oil Pressure Warning Light S271 This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut OFF the engine as soon as possible A single chime will sound when this light turns on 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Do not operate the ve
143. ase casurement ups statistics with the Fertor the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within mance Pages is intended for off highway or off road three seconds of resetting the currently displayed func ie Only Bhd eBOUIO Or BE Cone onay publie tion gt Reset ALL will display during this three second roadways ow iecummended HE satu Se be window used in a controlled environment and within the limits of the law The capabilities of the vehicle as measured by the performance pages must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which can jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The Performance Pages include the following features e 0 60 mph 0 100 km h e Braking Distance 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EBENEN e 1 8 Mile e 1 4 Mile e Instantaneous G Force e Peak G Force e Digital Speedometer To access press and release the MENU button until Performance Pages displays in the EVIC Press the SCROLL button to cycle through the features Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to select a feature The following describes each feature and its operation 0 60 mph 0 100 km h When selected this screen displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph 0 to 100 km h within 10 seconds e The feature will ready when the vehicle speed is at 0 mph 0 km h The word READY will flash when conditions are
144. assenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your autho rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns
145. at will be felt within two to five minutes WARNING e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical conditions must exer cise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Folding Rear Seat When the seatback is folded to the upright position make The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the additional storage area Pull on the loops shown in the seatback above the seat strap illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks These loops can be tucked away when not in use WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in an accident Children should
146. ate Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule M Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires J If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary O CC C C C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 l 380 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M A i i i i i 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service id 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Idi Service Schedule M Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Ll 4 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires A filter 1 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner N J Rotate tires filter and replace if necessary C J Replace the air conditioning filter Pp g E M Inspect the brake linings and replace if n
147. be used to select an item and the AUDIO MODE button can be used to return to the previous menu When the Map display is active pressing the FUNCTION SELECT but ton will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu Turn by Turn Directions The EVIC displays Turn by Turn directions to a pro grammed destination when Turn by Turn Navigation is enabled through Personal Settings When enabled the EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the top of the screen followed by an arrow to indicate the direction to turn the vehicle and a count down to indicate the distance to the turn NOTE Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS If Equipped Press and release the MENU button until Surround Sound displays in the EVIC The EVIC provides infor mation on the current surround mode e Stereo e Video Surround e Audio Surround While in the Surround Sound menu press the FUNC TION SELECT button to change surround modes The Video Surround Mode will only be available for video media sources DVDs Video CDs or other video media supported by the radio 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se System Warnings Customer Information Features Press and release the MENU button until SYSTEM WARNINGS displays in the EVIC Then press the SCROLL button to display anyone of the following choices o Oil Temperature Shows the actual oil temperature
148. birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS MOPARS fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 397 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 ITY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercargov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe t
149. c Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID yg SE eS akon ee gaa asi Selecting uconnect studios H Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 227 Satellite Mode 00 0000 220 W Climate Controls 000 227 Satellite Antenna wee ee 220 Automatic Temperature Control 227 Reception Quality 0 0 221 Operating lips 4 bx pe kenti as 232 Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Mode sees 221 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EBENEN INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES Sicb31db 1 Air Outlet 7 Climate Control 13 Hood Release 2 Instrument Cluster 8 Heated Seat Switch 14 Trunk Release Button 3 Hazard Switch 9 Power Outlet 15 Headlight Switch 4 Electronic Stability Program OFF Button 10 Ash Tray f Equipped 5 Glove Compartment 11 Storage Compartment 6 Radio 12 Ignition Switch UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 81905360 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON position 2 Trip Odometer Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of two trip odometer settings The letter A or B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two sec
150. call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep indicat ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the amp button Only the active call s will be terminated and if t
151. check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This mean
152. cked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12
153. connect studios Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek 4 up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL contro
154. coolant anti freeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze coolant that allows extended mainte nance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to five years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte nance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Anti freeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mixa minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated 342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area whe
155. ct and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor nia reformulated gasoline Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 a cape CAUTION Continued CAUTION e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Follow these guidelines to maintain your ve
156. cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Continued WARNING Continued e Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC airbags offer side impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy down ward covering both windows on the impact side THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occu pant protection e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC any obstructions NOTE Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners between you and the side airbags the performanc
157. display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 and 12 FM stations to
158. dow detrosteris o The reat window the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth defroster automatically turns off after approximately and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation the heating elements Labels can be peeled off press the button a second time after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS WM Instrument Panel Features 162 Mi Instrument Cluster 2 ee ee 163 Bl Instrument Cluster Descriptions 164 lll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 174 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays i e ERR x i E A 176 Engine Oil Change Indicator System 178 Trip Functions Performance Pages If Equipped Compass Display 00 0 uconnect gps If Equipped 186 Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS If Equipped creii scriescene RR ee 187 System Warnings Customer Information Features 188 Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 188 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME lll Sales Code RER REN AM FM CD DVD Radio If Equipped Operating Instructions Vo
159. downshift is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights and storage for sunglasses Universal Garage Door Opener HomeLink buttons and power sunroof switch may also be included if equipped 8125e191 Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights At the forward end of the console are two courtesy reading lights Press the lens to turn on the light Press it a second time to turn off the light These lights also turn on when a door is opened when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses The storage compartment access is a push push design Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open Push on the raised bar to close
160. e and or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle may could be adversely affected and or objects could deploy be pushed into you causing serious injury e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front but they will open during airbag deployment Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position everyone for the best interaction with the Advanced Front airbag Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Neve
161. e names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit ra
162. e vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Transmitter Battery Service The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee 1 Battery access is through a door located on the rear of 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the the Key Fob Insert a small flat blade screwdriver into the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause slot and gently pry open the access door Battery Replacement 1 Battery Access Door 021305151 battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 Reposition the access door panel over the battery opening and snap into place General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received in cluding interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications no
163. e 121 Headlight Washers 0 00 00 onines 336 Headlights sucre md aie ReRER TU es 364 Automate acus cce ans So Roe d dh ea 127 Bulb Replacement 0000 362 Cleaning apace ek bare so dre RE ER ERES 352 Delay 4 igen ogi o sionat Gee Passa 127 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 129 Lights On Reminder 2 24 2s cesis ss 128 On With Wipers 0000004 127 133 PASSING iactu ebbe ed Wa hee eae hed 130 SWC d MED 126 Time Delay issena Tangat miie RR E ERG 127 Washers iue nic d ed nacta Seem ed iney 336 Heated Mirrors ae aane na eens 84 Heated Seats 0 0 cece ee eee 123 Heater Engine Block 00006 241 High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch 129 Holder Coimeas of ein ate are ae RENE 154 Holder Cup s sies erate RENE 153 HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter Hood Release llle 125 ln EA 13 KEY curado odas Ee t ana ici Roe nea d en 12 13 410 INDEX aaa Ignition Key Removal osese tess awm enemies ai 13 Illuminated Erntty eese xe ea 18 Immobilizer Sentry Key 200 15 Infant Restraint 0 0 0 0000 62 63 Information Center Vehicle 05 174 Inside Rearview Mirror 040 81 Instrument Cluster 0 00000 ce eae 163 164 Instrument Panel and Controls 162 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 352 Integrated Power Module Fuses 353 Interior
164. e ABS light remains on or turns on while driving then the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required However the con ventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock Brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 24 Low Fuel Indicator Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound when the fuel level drops to 1 8 tank 25 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD The OBD system monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems The MIL will turn on when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the MIL does not come on when turning the key from LOCK to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel econom
165. e Certification Label This information should be used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ME
166. e HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds The EVIC will display CLEARING CHANNELS Release the buttons when the EVIC mes sage states CHANNELS CLEARED It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage while training 1 Place the ignition in the RUN position EN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 2 Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm from the HomeLink buttons while keeping the EVIC display in view For optimal training point the battery end of the hand held transmitter away from the HomeLink 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the EVIC display changes from CHANNEL TRAINING to CHANNEL TRAINED Then release both the HomeLink and handheld trans mitter buttons If the EVIC display states DID NOT TRAIN repeat Step 3 If the signal is too weak replace the battery in the handheld transmitter It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
167. e Pedals If Equipped ll Electronic Speed Control To Activate 130 130 To Set At A Desired Speed To Deactivate To Resume Speed To Vary The Speed Setting To Accelerate For Passing Bl Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights Sunglasses Storage ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped Programming HomeLink Gate Operator Canadian Programming Using HomeLink 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Reprogramming A Single HomeLink BUON E 145 Security ie ceva e Ro ex ena En 146 Troubleshooting Tips 146 General Information 146 ower Sunroof If Equipped 147 Opening Sunroof Express 148 Closing Sunroof Express 148 Pinch Protect Feature 0 005 148 Pinch Protect Override 148 Venting Sunroof Express 148 Sunshade Operation i 149 Wind Buffeting 000 149 Sunroof Maintenance Ignition Off Operation Sunroof Fully Closed li Electrical Power Outlets lll Cupholders Front Seat Cupholders Rear Seat Cupholders H Storage Console Features Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped With 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat Bl Rear Window Features
168. e by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME SALES CODE RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate INGLE DIC wr ru SELECT Ca Tt 042305232 RES Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holdi
169. e degree rely on the phone and network and Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to not the uconnect phone the uconnect phone When this happens the connec tion can generally be reestablished by switching the e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by hone i Iowerine the invchicle audio volume phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to 5 remain in Bluetooth ON mode NE e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Fowerep After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu Towing English Francais Last Enter Number Number on Phone is redialed See Phonebook Flowchart See Setup Flowchart The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated with entry is dialed Number is Dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030607515 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Voice Tree Phonebook Phonebook Enter Name Entries Listed One 1st Confirmation at a time Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Current Number is played E
170. e eee Oars 128 Column Lock 2m pega eos 134 ll rc 254 255 Tilt Column x22 rm rrr ERE s 134 Wheel Tilt 220 ove coed eee RR EUER 134 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 2 2 eee eee 225 DLOLApe uakai taae de aoa a dea 154 361 Storage Vehicle syo s sees e hn 233 361 Storing Your Vehicle st sears aa aias 361 Stuck Freeing 418 INDEX ae Sun ROOF i e ge aad due ER RESTE 147 Sunglasses SLOrage 4 ks eme sedo rer Eg 140 Sunroof Maintenance eee 149 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 48 synthetic Engine Oll isis x3 erand ER 329 System Remote Starting secco ananasas 23 Tachometer oss se RR e e i ne 164 Telescoping Steering Column 134 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 227 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 165 304 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 66 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Theft System Security Alarm 17 Tilt Steering Column 000006 134 Time Delay Headlight 127 Tire and Loading Information Placard 271 Tire Identification Number TIN 270 Tire Markings lt x isis scere dep rr ps 267 Tire Safety Information 04 267 TIREED ca egets e ait ae ee o bs 305 Ties paa gos Mate did P hg ads Sa te re 75 275 399 Aging Life of Tires seca sess sma ne diais 280 Ait Press ie acabas wee re ikas 275 CHAINS M RTI 281 General I
171. e oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires J If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary O O C C C C Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 386 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the
172. e receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact d
173. e shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the brake pedal must be firmly pressed before the shift lock will release Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive The vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position 244 STARTING AND OPERATING EE WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the transmission into PARK remove the key fob from the ignition switch and apply the parking brake Once the key fob is removed from the ignition switch the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle Over Temperature Mode The transmission electronics constantly monitor the trans mission oil temperature If the transmission exceeds nor mal operating temperature the transmission will change the way it shifts to help control the condition This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in DRIVE position After the transmis sion cools down it will return to normal operat
174. e that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ou
175. e the MENU button To reset the oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty e Trip A e Trip B e Elapsed Time e Display Units of Measure in Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the curre
176. e used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped place the transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase the engine idle speed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads 240 F 116 C or greater pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range 200 230 F 93 110 C If the pointer remains at 240 F 116 C or greater and you hear a chime turn the engine off immediately and call for service EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 305 NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and
177. eadlamp Park Turn Lamp And Front Side Marker Lamp Models With Halogen Headlamps 344 Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp And Park Turn Lamp Models With High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID Backup Lamp Side Marker Lamp Tail Turn Lamp And Tail Stop Lamp License Lamp lll Fluids And Capacities Bl Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts Engine Chassis es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 6 1L Bic8cc29 1 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 6 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 2 Integrated Power Module 7 Air Cleaner Filter 3 Coolant Pressure Cap 8 Engine Oil Fill 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 5 Engine Coolant Reservoir 10 Washer Fluid Reservoir 324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these syst
178. ear Indicators 00 279 Trip Odometer 25 2 sz Rma 164 Trunk Lid Deck Lid 00 35 36 Trunk Release Emergency llle 36 Trunk Release Remote Control 35 TUN SIGNALS shes drehen n so beets 129 166 UCI Connector ee rm ad alee mets 214 uconnect Hands Free Phone 85 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 399 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 214 Universal Transmitter sese 141 Unleaded Gasoline 0 0 000 292 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 420 INDEX aaa Vanity Mirrors ze er c ge hae ead Shoe a ag 84 Variance COMPASS s i veo Ree RR s 185 Vehicle Certification Label 299 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 0 272 298 300 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage aia eben da ae pes 233 361 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Viscosity Engine Oil 1 2 62 eee 329 Voice Recognition System VR 113 Warning Flasher Hazard 304 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 164 Warnings and Cautions 0004 6 Warranty Information 06 396 Washer Adding Fluid 004 336 Washers Windshield 132 133 336 Washing Vehicle ssai ated ERO ns 349 Water Driving Through 65er Rer
179. eat belt safely and to keep your pas e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat Sengers nale tob Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision best Continued Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the front seat 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide thelatch plate into the buckle until you hear a click plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt j go around your lap ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING A belt that is
180. eating position Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in the rear seat How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive Emer gency Locking mode Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items After a collision deploys the airbags and or pretensi
181. ecautions 414 INDEX BEEN Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Outside Rearview Mirrors 0 4 82 Overhead Console llle 140 Overheating Engine ics e x Ree 304 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 397 Paint Care 422222 ie diae 4 Rx hu FRE ee 348 Panic Alarm 2mizk od e 9 EIC RESTE ES 21 Parking Brake duet y eR yw ER 256 Passing Light 2 0 0 cee eee erias 130 Pedals Adjustable 0 0000 000 135 Personal Settings x2 ore cs oimn SE ES 188 jl PP ETT 71 Phone Cellular eee eee 85 Phone Hands Free uconnect 85 Placard Tire and Loading Information 271 Power Brakes i do e Re RE Ce 257 Deck Lid Release 000 0000 35 Distribution Center Fuses Ls 356 Dor LOKS obese aed Rer etre hend 26 Mirrors 2d doe go gue dr eae b ge Pd Rd Re 84 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 150 Das cere Sesh tthe tia ade tenet heh enh ah hates 119 vitz m 254 255 SUDFOO s tesga epange ROG er ure PIE Gs 147 WindOWS sc exERP LS X RRESPISUBREPRG 32 Power Steering Fluid 0 372 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 47 Pretensioners Seat Belts iier a eee pienas 45 Programmable Electronic Features 188 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 0 0 19 Radial Ply Tires cu eee Rees 278 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 342 Radio
182. ecessary S Inspect the CV joints C M Inspect the exhaust system H Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for E damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary D J Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet U or frequent trailer towing L E 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 381 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires J Inspect the rear axle fluid Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the OCO CO C O C O following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace the e
183. ecial Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami nants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi tions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and underbody protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle ee MAINT
184. econd detent and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is turned off the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles and then turn off Headlights On with Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Telescoping Control Handle To unlock the s
185. ect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book lo cated on the DVD for further warranty informa tion The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endor
186. ectrical shock or electro cution if not serviced properly See your authorized dealer for service ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 NOTE On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps when the headlamps are turned on there is a blue hue to the lights This diminishes and becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds as the system charges Backup Lamp Side Marker Lamp Tail Turn Lamp and Tail Stop Lamp 1 Open the trunk 2 Remove two fasteners from the back of the taillamp assembly 812c4b54 3 Pull back the trunk liner 4 Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the taillamp assembly 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side 8 Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun terclockwise to remove it from the taillamp assembly 6 Disconnect the electrical connector 818ec652 1 Backup Lamp Bulb 7 Pull the taillamp assembly clear from the vehicle to access the bulbs ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 818ec611 818ec69d 2 Side Marker Lamp Bulb 3 Tail Turn Lamp Bulb 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se 4 Tail Stop Lamp Bulb 818ec6ac 9 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 10 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the taillamp assembly and then turn it clockwise 11 Reinstall the taillamp assembly fasteners electrical connector and trunk liner
187. ed including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau thorized operation If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from starting and provide the following audible and visible signals the horn will pulse the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash Rearming of the System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn off after three minutes turn all of the visual signals off after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm the System Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter After the last door is closed or if all doors are closed the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm itself in about 16 seconds During that time the Vehicle Security Light will flash If it does not illuminate the Vehicle Security Alarm is not arming In addition if you open a door during the arming period the Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the arming pro cess If you wish to rearm the Vehicle Security Alarm after closing the doo
188. ee cea Re esa rm ed oun 3 329 Sentry Key Immobilizer 15 Sentry Key Programming llle 16 Sentry Key Replacement 16 Service Assistance llle 393 Service Contract llle 395 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator isses 173 Service Manuals llle 397 en INDEX 417 Setting the Clock 0 0 192 195 204 Settings Personal seed RR pe Res 188 Shif ng oie ead bP eee bide fh ee exe Rege 242 Automatic Transmission 242 246 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 43 Shoulder Belts 2 59 dera out a yall ars 38 Signals TUM s s secsi s Ee soye mei a ga 75 129 166 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 251 Snow Chains Tire Chains 281 Snow GES uas epe e pg bed 283 Sound System Kickers 26i e ed ge goa PERPE 224 Spark Plugs se aee EY WE NEMPE Vu 371 Specifications Fuel Gasoline ip RR Ree 371 Oll isse ede eI ER ees S Y Ed 371 Speed Control Cruise Control 136 Speedometer sira tases reiia eb bw ya ew 164 DARING ui ser i eS ewe San deoa Ed 23 239 Automatic Transmission ls 239 Emergency Jump Starting 315 Engine Fails to Start 000 240 Remote Vas dusk ues RU Aer ded ed EA eS dte 23 Starting and Operating 05 239 Starting Procedures 00000000000 239 Steering Column Controls isse eee ee
189. ely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components e Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze per formance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals es MAINTAINING YOUR
190. emicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC system serviced as well ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modi Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the
191. ems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will appear in the odometer or a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325 TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this
192. enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Lock Doors Au tomatically at 15 mph 24 km h under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the Key Fob in the ignition switch 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start engine 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es 3 Depress the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Cycle the ignition after performing steps one to four for the feature to be enabled or disabled 6 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor dance with local laws Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Au
193. enance services determined by the engineers who designed your NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule there are other components which WARNING may require servicing or replacement in the future You can be badly injured working on or around a CAUTION motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per you have any doubt about your ability to perform a form repairs and service when necessary could service job take your vehicle to a competent me result in more costly repairs damage to other chanic components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center Continued 328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component m
194. endent on the mix of the original recording Some audio will sound better in DSS modes others in Stereo mode When in Audio Surround mode balance is set auto matically Fader control is available to add more sur round audio if desired UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS Center EVIC The EVIC features a driver interactive The remote sound system controls are located on the display which is located in the instrument cluster surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o clock The VOLUME Button controls the sound peus level of the sound system Press the top of the VOLUME button to increase the sound VOLUME level Press the bottom of the VOLUME Button button to decrease the sound level mm Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the D Compass Temp Audio screen This screen displays radio and media mode information AUDIO depending on which radio is in the vehicle MODE Button 045105297 If the Compass Temp Audio screen is already displayed Remote Sound System Controls when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed then the Vehicles equipped with steering wheel mounted buttons mode will change ie from AM to FM to Media mode are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information etc depending on which radio is in the vehicle 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss When the EVIC is in the Compass Temp Audio screen press the FUNCTION SE LECT button to operate vario
195. er to Adding Fuel in Section 5 Insert Key Turn To Run refer to Remote Starting System in Section 2 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Upshift Stereo if equipped with Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS Video Surround if equipped with Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS Audio Surround if equipped with Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS 0 60 mph 0 100 km h if equipped with Performance Pages Braking Distance if equipped with Performance Pages 1 8 Mile if equipped with Performance Pages 1 4 Mile if equipped with Performance Pages Instantaneous G Force if equipped with Performance Pages e Peak G Force if equipped with Performance Pages Digital Speedometer if equipped with Performance Pages Engine Oil Change Indicator System Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 releas
196. eration How Blower Control Mode Control Control Control A C Operation Full Automatic Operation Set blower knob to either Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob be overridden to Auto Set temperature for 10 minutes knobs for comfort at a time Blower Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any User selectable Automatic Automatic Automatic but can Automatic desired airflow level other to any speed be overridden than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode for 10 minutes knob to Auto Set temperature at a time knobs for comfort Mode Preferred Automatic Set mode knob to any desired Automatic User sclectable Automatic User selectable User selectable air delivery point other than to any air outside or A C on or off Auto Set blower knob to delivery point recirculated either Hi or Lo Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Blower and Mode Set blower knob to any User selectable User selectable Automatic User selectable User selectable Preferred Automatic desired airflow level other than Hi or Lo Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort to any speed to any air delivery point outside or recirculated A C on or off 81341de7 The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the mode control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Defrost G
197. esigned to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced Y 49 Ve aawal ors 054903773 1 US DOT Safety 4 Maximum Load Standards Code TIN ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure T hich 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and e lemporary spare tires are high pressure compact Temperature Grades spares designed for temporary emergency use only 268 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M Tire Sizing Chart e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm
198. etween Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass head ing 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel such as iPod s Cell Phones Lap tops and Radar Detectors This is where the compass module is located and it can cause interference with the compass sensor and it may give false readings 040506040 Compass Variance Map 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the HOME button for approximately two seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Compass Variance message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the HOME button to exit uconnect gps If Equipped uconnect gps Display Control Press and release the MENU button until Navigation displays in the EVIC When the Navigation System is On the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map or Menu display on the Navigation Unit When the Menu ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 display is active the SCROLL button can be used to scroll through the list the FUNCTION SELECT button can
199. event the To avoid serious injury or death engine from starting Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure Center Console Power Outlet 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw e After the use of high power draw accessories or power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage Continued N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 CUPHOLDERS Rear Seat Cupholders The rear seat cu
200. eze Do not attempt jump starting because the battery could rupture or explode The battery temperature must be brought above the freezing point before attempting jump start Jump Starting 7 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster Positive Battery Post battery Let the engine idle a few minutes then start the 2 Ground engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 3 Front of Vehicle NOTE Refer to Synchronizing ESP under Electronic Stability Program in Section 5 if the ESP BAS light in the 318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME instrument cluster remains on continuously after starting the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery 8 When removing the jumper cables reverse the above sequence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan WARNING Any procedure other than above could result in e Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out the battery vent e Personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion CAUTION Any procedure other than above could result in damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of immobilized vehicle FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between RE VERSE and DRIVE Using minimal accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rockin
201. facing in the Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher older than one year can ride forward facing in the weight limit in the rearward facing direction than vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren in this section The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 Ibs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hi
202. feature See uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from downloaded or uconnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the uconnect phone for example after you start the vehicle e A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the uconnect phone e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu lar phone is accessible e Only the cellular phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the uconnect phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to uconnect phone on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the amp button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept
203. flates to the recommended pressure or is at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes 1 Press the power button 3 to turn off the TIREFIT kit 2 Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the Sealant Bottle 1 and place the sticker on the steering wheel 3 Immediately disconnect the Clear Sealant Hose 7 from the valve stem reinstall the Yellow Cap on the fitting at the end of the hose and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle storage location Quickly proceed to D Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire CAUTION e The metal end fitting from Power Plug and Cable 5 may get hot after use so should be handled carefully Failure to reinstall the Yellow Cap on the fitting at the end of the Clear Sealant Hose 7 can result in sealant contacting your skin clothing and the vehicle s interior It can also result in sealant con tacting internal TIREFIT kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313 D Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating tire drive the vehicle 5 miles 8 km or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire Do not exceed 55 mph 88 km h WARNING TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using TIREFIT Do not exceed 55 mph 88 km h until having the tire repaired or replaced Failure to follow this wa
204. g motion without spin ning the wheels is most effective NOTE Turn off the Electronic Stability Program ESP if equipped or Traction Control System TCS if equipped before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Section 5 for further information en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319 CAUTION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving between 1st and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position The only ap proved method of towing without the ignition key is with a flatbed truck Proper towing equipment is neces sary to prevent damage to the vehicle Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flatbed towing is recommended DO
205. gain for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Operating Instructions uconnect studios Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to uconnect studios Satellite Radio in this section UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES and REQ REL RET radios only with uconnect For sales code RER REN REP REW or REZ touch screen radio UCI feature refer to the separate RER REN or REZ User s Manual UCI is available only if equipped as an option with these radios
206. gation system Refer to your uconnect tunes REN or RER user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Recognition System VR If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 Clock Setting Procedure uconnect gps RER only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward i
207. ges to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle TIRE CHAINS Never use a tire with a smaller load index or If driving conditions require tire chains for your vehicle capacity other than what was originally equipped use only chains that meet SAE type Class S specifica on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load tions In addition only install tire chains on 245 45ZR20 index could result in tire overloading and failure size tires Contact you local authorized dealership or tire You could lose control and have an accident dealer for these size tires Continued CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings 282 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires observe the following precautions Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components it is important that only chains in good condition are used Bro ken chains can cause serious damage Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate chain breakage Remove the damaged parts of the chain before further use Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly a
208. grade The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the parking brake push the parking brake pedal down and then remove your foot from the pedal To release the parking brake push down on the parking brake pedal and then release ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do notleave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident Parking Brake The Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will turn on when the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is ON BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic BRAKE brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is system will still function There will be some applied It does not show the degree of brake application loss of overall braking effectiveness This may be evident by increased pedal travel during application greater 258 STARTING AND OPERATING EE pedal force required to slow or stop and potential activation of the Brake Warning Light
209. hat produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning 9 Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately six to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup It also includes diagnostics that will illumi
210. hat your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes 398 Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the in formation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled vehicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven d
211. he air cleaner filter housing may be necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp assembly on the driver side of the vehicle 2 Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counter clockwise and then pull it out of the headlamp assembly CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 3 Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and install the replacement bulb 4 Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head lamp assembly and then turn it clockwise 818ec6c7 3 Park Turn Lamp Bulb 818ec6ba 1 High Beam Headlamp Bulb 2 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Side Marker Lamp Bulb 818ec6e2 Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp and Park Turn Lamp Models with High Intensity Discharge Headlamps HID HID Headlamps The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off and the key removed Because of this you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb yourself If a headlamp bulb fails take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service WARNING A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlight switch is turned ON It may cause serious el
212. he button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected NOTE To control the air conditioning manually the mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position e Recirculation Control This button can be used to block out smoke odors dust high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired The Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily An indicator in the button illuminates when the Recirculation mode is active You may use this feature separately NOTE Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibil ity For this reason the system will not allow recirculation to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost Floor mode Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the indicator in the control button to blink and then turn off Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solution of 50 ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures i
213. here is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The uconnect phone will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the uconnect phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the uconnect phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the uconnect phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the uconnect phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the uconnect phone to the cellular phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the cellu lar phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF ucon
214. hicle s Most of these products contain high concentra performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition mm malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed some light smoke your engine may be out of tune against you or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued 206 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Continued WARNING e Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate trunk closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon
215. hicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure shown in Section 7 15 High Beam Light HD This light will turn on when the high beam 7 headlights are ON Push the multifunction lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high beam 16 Seat Belt Reminder Light This light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON A chime will sound if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check The Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check or when driving 17 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission 18 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 19 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage Refer to Trip Odometer Button for additional information NOTE U S Federal regulations require that upon trans fer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the pur chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repa
216. hield may also cause poor operation of this system e Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begin to fog press the recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured inte rior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not allow recirculation to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost Floor mode Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes will cause the indicator in the control button to blink and then turn off Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of blower preferred automatic mode preferred automatic or blower and mode preferred automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the blower control knob on the left NOTE e For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start opera tion if the blower control is left in the O Off position e Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Op eration Chart that follows for details Automatic Temperature Control Operation 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se The system will Air Temperature Air Recirculation Op
217. houlder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasion ally and pull it tight if necessary The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking Mode in order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed Refer to Automatic Locking Mode in this section A locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking feature is enabled Position the shoulder and lap belt on the child restraint The automatic locking retractor is activated by first attaching the child seat then pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor then allowing the webbing to retract back into the retractor Tighten web bing To release simply unbuckle the seat belt by de pressing the button allowing the webbing to retract into the retractor In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt you may need to do something more Disconnect the latch plate from
218. i tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When clean
219. iagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M e Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 399 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service
220. ice Recognition System VR If Equipped Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Clock Setting Procedure Bl Sales Code RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 194 lll Sales Code RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play ll Universal Consumer Interface UCI If Equipped Connecting The iPod Using This Feature Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 Play Mode 22 29s rte e ees 216 Operating Instructions uconnect phone Ci Equipped erunt Sw aie des pers 223 List Or Browse Mode 217 TW Bl uconnect studios Satellite Radio E a piss Suum Vathi 1 E gupped REN RER RES Radios CMs ME qb Bede sese si nore dba es ied 224 System Activation less 219 Bl Remote Sound System Controls Electroni
221. icle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Oil Change Re quired under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 or under Odometer Trip Odometer under Instrument Cluster Descriptions in Section 4 At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level Refer to Engine Oil under Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 PEE Once a Month Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S
222. ide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 375 NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your veh
223. ight 165 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 174 Emergency Deck Lid Release 36 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 318 Hazard Warning Flasher 304 Jump Starting s aes koe ege mna dea ss 315 Overheating 5 ct sc Tu bad PELA nena mitas 304 TOWING isan clase ehwed ogee enm EP nS gu 319 Emergency Trunk Release 0 0 36 Emission Control System Maintenance 325 374 EDGING s voces ee demdus e ee es gags v eran 323 Air Cleaner 2 22 60s bee e Rh a 330 Block Heater senaat ausis piae Re 241 Break In Recommendations 71 Checking Oil Level 6 2 2 0000050 328 Compartment sse serres deo Ree ineat 323 Coolant Antifreeze llle 340 371 Cooling 4 io ce e eoe tS near cete 339 Exhaust Gas Caution 05 73 296 en INDEX 407 Fails to Start onesie ee ERR eR 240 Flooded Starting 0 0 0 eee 240 Fuel Requirements 004 292 Jump Starting seeti a ae hah ak pe ace Re rane 315 EET 328 370 371 Oil Change Interval sess 329 Oil Filler Cap s 0 334 0 cc28983 dgedce does 329 Oil Filter 22 9 cee e eee ee aes 330 Oil Filter Disposal 000 330 Oil Selection ea nn 329 370 Oil Synthetic 224 05 t4 ERROR REA 329 Overh ating 2e eae a des 304 Temperature Gauge sass sutat aka na aa 165 Engine Oil Viscosity 6 6 6 0 eee eee 329 Enhanced Accident Response
224. in or near Gas Cap Tether Hook the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Continued 208 STARTING AND OPERATING EE WARNING Continued e Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running e A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Section 7 VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicl
225. ing the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 1 Clean with a wet soft rag or micro fiber towel A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent with the cupholder in the center console NOTE The cupholder cannot be removed FUSES Integrated Power Module The Integrated Power Module IPM is located in the engine compartment This module contains fuses and relays me fs Integrated Power Module 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Car Mini Description tridge Fuse e When installing the integrated power module Fuse cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop 15 Amp Washer Motor erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so Blue may allow water to get into the integrated power me 25 Amp Powertrain Control module and
226. instrument cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running The system will turn the ESP BAS Malfunction Indica tor Light on continuously while the engine is running if it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or both If the light remains on after several ignition cycles and you have driven the vehicle several miles kilome ters at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h and the ESP is synchronized refer to Synchronizing ESP see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light will turn on momen tarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position e Each time the ignition is turned to the ON position the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned OFF previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when the ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation STARTING AND OPERATING 267 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H Tire Markings e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires d
227. inued WARNING Continued e To help protect against personal injury passengers e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts WARNING The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle Continued heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or be come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 REAR WINDOW FEATURES CAUTION Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on when the tear win
228. ion Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the ignition switch to the LOCK posi tion The key fob can only be removed from the ignition switch when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to any other switch position ACC ON or START engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed ee STARTING AND OPERATING 245 Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical system malfunction occurs i e dead battery To access the override remove the rubber tray from the storage bin located to the right of the shift lever The override access port is at the top of the bin to the right of the shift lever gate 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position without starting the engine 2 Firmly set the parking brake Interlock Manual Override 5 Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position 6 The vehicle may then be started in
229. ired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero This display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist For more information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in this section Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a Check Gascap message will display in the odometer display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL 20 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicat
230. is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on e Left Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e RKE Battery Low with a single chime e Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in PARK es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph 1 6 km h Door s Ajar with a single chime if vehicle is in motion Trunk Ajar with a single chime Oil Pressure Oil Change Required with single chime Low Washer Fluid with a single chime Channel Transmit Channel Training Channel Trained Clearing Channels Channels Cleared Did Not Train e Left Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Starting And Operating Tire Section e Left Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Starting And Operating Tire Section Right Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Starting And Operating Tire Section Right Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to Starting And Operating Tire Section Check TPM System with a single chime Refer to Starting And Operating Tire Section Check Gascap ref
231. iscs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on away and jam the player mechanism convertible or soft top models if equipped RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert SEEK Button mm a second CD if one is already loaded Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to
232. isk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 WARNING A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the ancho
233. itches There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position WARNING Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death AUTO Down Feature The driver door power window switch and some model passenger door power window switches have an AUTO down feature Press the window switch to the second detent release and the window will go down automati cally ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the AUTO down operation pull up on the switch briefly The power window switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Sec tion 4 of this manual AUTO Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection
234. k by pressing and holding the RW button Holding the RW button long enough will take you to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five seconds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track If the SEEK button is pressed during the first two seconds of the track it will jump to the previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the track it will jump to the beginning of the track If you press the SEEK gt gt button during play mode it will jump to the next track in the list While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressing the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once you have E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 seen all screens the last INFO button press will take you back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod mode to repeat the current playing track Press the SCAN button to use iPod scan mode which will play the first five seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track
235. ke B Setting Up to Use TIREFIT 1 Remove the gloves from the Accessory Storage Com partment 8 and place them on your hands 2 Turn the Mode Select knob 4 to the Sealant Mode position 3 Uncoil the Clear Sealant Hose 7 and then remove the Yellow Cap from the fitting at the end of the hose 4 Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire 5 Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw the fitting at the end of the Clear Sealant Hose 7 onto the valve stem 6 Uncoil the Power Plug and Cable 5 and then insert the plug into the vehicle s 12 Volt power outlet NOTE Do not remove foreign objects e g screws or nails from the tire E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 311 C Injecting TIREFIT Sealant into the deflated tire e Always start the engine before turning ON the TIRE FIT kit e After pressing the Power Button 3 the sealant white fluid will flow from the Sealant Bottle 1 through the Sealant Hose 7 and into the tire NOTE Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the tire If the sealant white fluid does not flow within 0 10 seconds through the clear Sealant Hose 7 1 Press the Power Button 3 to turn OFF the TIREFIT kit Disconnect the Clear Sealant Hose 7 from the valve stem Make sure the valve stem is free of debris Recon nect the Clear Sealant Hose 7 to the valve stem Check that mode select knob 4 is on sealant mode position and not air m
236. l passengers are also properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Power Sunroof Controls 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Opening Sunroof Express Press the power sunroof switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any posi tion The sunroof will open fully and then stop automati cally This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the power sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Express Press the power sunroof switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close opera tion any movement of the power sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the power sunroof switch forward and release to Express Close Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the power sunroof switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occur
237. l 25er Revers 75 128 129 166 Vanity Mirror iced eh e e rgo reed 84 Voltage cecer EIER IE dohed eh re Pes 164 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 164 Loading Vehicle 0000000000 298 300 Capacities uie os doe eee eda bs 300 TAPES s aon gig Oa each ea ha eee BG ieu 271 LOCKS ceo BA a eee AS exe Ya RACE PUR UE Ys 25 Auto Unlock ies aed Ra ace Ped oats 28 Automatic Door llle 27 Child Protection l l 29 DOOR eco sje m 6x RERO COR LESE 3 xS 25 Power DOOE usus aces eae es ERE RR 26 Low Tire Pressure System 05 285 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH xui dr e re Spas RR I apd 66 67 Lubrication Body ees 335 Lumbar Support 2 sess aimee RR 120 Maintenance Free Battery 331 Maintenance General llle 327 Maintenance Procedures 0 0000005 327 Maintenance Schedule Ls 374 Maintenance Sunroof 00000 eee 149 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 173 325 Manual Service 0 0 0 0 eee eee 397 Map Reading Lights 130 140 Master Cylinder Brakes 04 345 Methanol i22 es Ru RR 54064004 293 Mini Trip Computer 000 000 0000 179 MITOS amp cece a od Roe edm oe UC RO RUE RR aes 81 Automatic Dimming less 82 Electric Powered llle 84 en INDEX 413 Electric Remote llle 84 Exterior Folding
238. l knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satel
239. lable Menu press the S button and say Help or Main Menu Commands The Voice Recognition VR system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the 4 button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni tion VR system is speaking Please note the volume setting for VR is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Radio FM To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In this mode you may say the fol
240. lerator pedal To Vary the Speed Seiting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing up and holding the Electronic Speed Control lever in RESUME ACCEL When the Electronic Speed Control lever is released a new set speed will be established Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever is tapped speed increases so tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the Electronic Speed Control lever in SET DECEL Release the Electronic Speed Control lever when the desired speed is reached and a new set speed will be established ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to SET DE CEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever is tapped speed decreases To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal The automatic transmission will downshift while climb ing uphill or descending downhill This
241. lite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions uconnect phone If Equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL KICKER HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER SELECTABLE SURROUND DSS IF EQUIPPED 046405510 Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio amplifier that provides 5 1 channel surround sound from any stereo audio source A new feature of the KICKER audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound for any audio source Audio Surround is optimized for front seat passengers for any audio source This surround effect is available for audio from any source AM FM CD Satellite Radio or AUX and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Refer to Driver Selectable Surround Sound DSS under Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC in Section 4 DSS modes for audio sources are Stereo and Audio Surround which is surround sound equalized for the front seat occupants The Video Surround mode is described under KICKER Mobile Surround KMS1 9 Please note that DSS effects are dep
242. llustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg 274 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Occupants Combined weight of AVAILABLE occupants and cargo Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weight Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ibs ABR 100 tbs EXAMPLE 1 865 Ibs E 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 bs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 Ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 E STARTING AND OPERATING 275 WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
243. lowing commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Disc To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you e Main Menu to switch to the main menu my say the dollowing con nancis Satellite Radio To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Track 8 to change the track Radio In this mode you may say the following com e Next Track to play the next track fans e Previous Track to play the previous track e Channel Number to change the channel by its s Main Mesi ocv de the miima spoken number Memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In e Previous Channel to select the previous channel this mode you may say the following commands e Next Channel to select the next channel e List Channel to hear a list of available channels e New Memo to record a new memo During the recording you may press the button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of the following e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu commands e Select Name to say the name of a channel e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Save to save the memo es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Continue to c
244. lue tor DLC Wireless Con Yellow trol Module WCM Wireless Ignition Node 18 vara Selectable Power Outlet WIN 9 20 Amp Power Outlet ad E a a Stop Lights Yellow 30 10 11 os 21 22 p J Z ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 23 31 24 32 25 33 26 34 27 10 Amp Occupant Restraint 35 5 Amp Antenna Module Red Controller ORC Orange if equipped Power 28 10 Amp Ignition Run Mirrors Red 36 25 Amp Hands Free Phone if 29 5 Amp Cluster Electronic Natural equipped Video Moni Orange Stability Program ESP tor if equipped Radio Powertrain Control 37 15 Amp Transmission Module PCM STOP Blue LIGHT Switch 30 10 Amp Door Modules Power Red Mirrors Steering Control Module SCM 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Car Mini Description Cavity Car Mini Description tridge Fuse tridge Fuse Fuse Fuse 38 10 Amp Cargo Light Satellite 42 30 Amp Front Blower Motor Red Receiver SDARS Pink Video if equipped 43 30 Amp Rear Window Defroster Vehicle Infor
245. ly Continued opera tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this should occur safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop shut the engine OFF and allow the vehicle to cool Thereafter obtain service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications immediately es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339 To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage Cooling System e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition WARNING when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at any time the e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any
246. ly charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 394 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE EBENEN This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Gro
247. mation Pink Mode 7 equipped 44 20 Amp Amplifier if equipped 39 e a s cm d Blue Sunroof if equipped e if equippe d BE Cavities 11 12 and 13 contain self resetting fuses 40 5 Amp Auto Inside Rearview 5 Orange Mirror Heated Seats circuit breakers that are only serviceable by an autho if equipped Switch rized dealer The cluster and the driver seat switch are Bank fused by the 25 amp circuit breaker in cavity 11 The assenger seat switch is fused by the 25 amp circuit 41 P 5 y P breaker in cavity 12 The door modules the driver power window switch and the passenger power window switch are fused by the 25 amp circuit breaker in cavity 13 If you experience temporary or permanent loss of these systems see your authorized dealer for service ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 VEHICLE STORAGE If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take these steps to protect your battery e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Rear Courtesy Reading Lamps WsW Rear Compartment Trunk Lamp
248. met for the event to begin e Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph 100 km h in less then 10 seconds e The time will continue to display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run time and display the vehicle s best 0 60 mph 0 100 km h time To clear the vehicle s best 0 60 mph 0 100 km h time press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for five seconds Braking Distance When selected this screen displays the vehicle s braking distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was depressed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 This feature will only function when applying the brakes at speeds above 30 mph 48 km h Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature The word READY will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin The distance and speed measurements display while the event is taking place The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com plete stop The distance and speed measurements will continue to display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the current run and prepare the cluster to record a new run 1 8 Mile 1 4 Mile When selected this screen displays the time it takes the vehicle to travel 1 8 mile 1 4 mile within 30 seconds and the vehicle s speed when it reaches 1 8
249. monoxide and other kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the ADDING FUEL vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap ventilation system to force fresh outside air into The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the the vehicle left side of the vehicle If so equipped use the finger pull to open the door Otherwise push in on the left side near the edge of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 CAUTION NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap tether in the hook located on the fuel filler cap door reinforcement e Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit
250. mote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the RUN position NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the RUN position in order to drive the vehicle e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC the message Insert Key Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you insert the Key Fob Once inserted the message Turn To Run will flash in the EVIC until you turn the Key Fob to run DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock plunger on each door trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the 2 door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward Door Lock Plunger 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door Power Door Locks the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not A power door lock switch is on each front door trim inside the vehicle before closing the door panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors WARNING e For personal security and safety in the event of an accident lock the vehicle doors before you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle When leaving the vehicle always remove the key fr
251. n Section 7 for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The climate control system filters outside air containing dust pollen and some odor
252. n a closed garage or Remote Start mode confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car bon monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters The engine can be started two consecutive times two away from children Operation of the Remote Start 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However System windows door locks or other controls the 1gnition switch must be cycled to the RUN position could cause serious injury or death before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Enter Remote Start Mode To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Press and release the REMOTE START button Vehicle 2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec Press and release the REMOTE START button one time onds The parking lights will flash and the horn or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request To Exit Re
253. n axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with tire chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch WARNING With the ESP switched OFF the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable In an emer gency evasive maneuver the ESP system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off ESP mode is intended for off highway or off road only Synchronizing ESP The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is ESP combined with BAS indicator If the power BAS supply is interrupted battery disconnected or discharged the ESP BAS Malfunction Indi cator Light may illuminate with the engine running If this should occur turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right The ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light should go out However if the light remains on have the ESP and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible 2060 STARTING AND OPERATING BENE ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the
254. n front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centime ters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle Flowing Rising Water WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so ee STARTING AND OPERATING 253 CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water CAUTION Continued e Driving through standing water may cause dam before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing wa ter Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued age to your vehicle s drivetrain components
255. n of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield 336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any condition is present please proceed to clea
256. n the transmission Vhen enpaped ene ote GIRL tver the is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control is Peec OT GDSIAHON Su Spede QUISIBSECMIRELAS Mp on 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control lever located on the right CAUTION side of the steering wheel operates the system Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls Pedal travel may become lim ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal s path WARNING Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving You could lose control and have an accident Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated simultaneously If this occurs the Electronic Speed Con trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed on the end of the Electronic Speed Control control system is on To turn the system off push and To Activate Push and release the ON OFF button located i lever The indicator light in the instrument cluster will illuminate to show that the speed release the ON OFF button again The system and the indicator
257. n top speed is displayed Compass Display The compass readings indicate the direction fn the vehicle is facing Press and release the HOME button to display one of eight compass HOME readings and the outside temperature Button ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to set the compass manually When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic and the CAL message does not appear in the EVIC display you must put the compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and hold the HOME button for approximately two seconds 3 Press the SCROLL button until Calibrate Compass displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to start the calibration The message CAL will display in the EVIC 5 Complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference b
258. n wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the front of the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4 1 of washer fluid when the message Low Washer Fluid appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337 Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when
259. nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain The TPMS consists of the following components correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light e Four TPM sensors e Receiver module 288 STARTING AND OPERATING e Various TPMS messages which display in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and e TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly if equipped has a TPM sensor The full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires A spare with a pressure below the low pressure limit will not cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings IV The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the 4 instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the EVIC will display one or more low pressure messages Left Front Left Rear Right Front Right Rear for three seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing Low Tire PS VE LS Fab M mi 819793fc Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the
260. nance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publica tions carefully Following the instructions and recom mendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine Mopar parts and cares about your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 amp qox mDe daont x nee n dd WATER IN FUEL REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD WIPER EXTERIOR BULB HIGH BEAM TURN SIGNALS eean ELECTRONIC en wren INTERMITTENT FAILURE SPEED CONTROL d Y3 b 2 Z N aC i QU A 9 7 euo
261. nate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and sever ity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the
262. nd trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 273 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX Ibs or XXX kg 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for i
263. nd on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 05301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Tire and Loading Information Placard ER SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS Ab
264. nd when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL General Information into any forward gear when the engine is above The automatic transmission selects individual gears au idle speed tomatically dependent upon Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal e Altitude e Vehicle loading e Driving style ee STARTING AND OPERATING 243 e Shift lever position e Accelerator position e Vehicle speed The gear shifting process is continuously adapted de pendent on the driving style the driving situation and the road characteristics NOTE e After selecting any driving position wait a moment to allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating especially when the engine is cold e If there is a need to restart the engine be sure to turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position before re starting Transmission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds after restart if the ignition switch is not turned to the LOCK position first e The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating Therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the break in period This is a normal condition and pre cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles Th
265. nect phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the uconnect phone is using e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every uconnect phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the amp button to begin ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the uconnect phone to allow use of this vehicle feature e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the uconnect phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased
266. ned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 min utes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Do not leave the Key Fob in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped in Section 4 Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the LOCK or ACC ignition position SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System preven
267. nel allows you to disable the window controls on the passenger doors To disable the window controls press and release the window lockout button setting it in the DOWN position To enable the window controls press and release the window lockout button again setting it in the UP position E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 Reset Anytime the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead the AUTO up function will be disabled To reactivate the AUTO up feature perform the following procedure after vehicle power is restored 1 Pull the window switch up to close window com pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND R
268. nformation sss 275 HighSpeed sers epee waned EE 278 Inflation Pressures 1 2 ee ee 276 Life of Tires c 2 425 e603 n Ra a 280 Load Capacity 1 2 6 eee eee eee 271 272 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 285 Pressure Warning Light 171 Quality Grading 000005 399 Radial iszezssee bee REPE E x eae 278 Replacement scie ieee e ks RR Leta 280 licum 283 Safety ses e aeuo Pie RG ee i eei 267 275 vc Er 268 ee INDEX 419 Snow Tires vue penu RR 3 yy eR 283 SPINNE ios diues ki redibat a wa b Race 278 Tread Wear Indicators lis 279 To Open Hood cca Re ns 125 TOWING crue ERR er eb RE ERE 301 24 Hour Towing Assistance sss 99 Behind a Motor Home 301 Disabled Vehicle 0 0 00 sees 319 Recreational llle 301 Towing Assistance eee 99 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home 301 Traction Control sieer cessa llle 261 Trailer Towing llle 301 Transmission selle 346 Automatie c eezseekbpesei9ei 242 246 346 Fluid z2 kec eB ee ce eSEE ES EX 372 SMUN iam ere bok Honec eqe iode ul ees 242 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 000 0 21 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 141 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry 00 19 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 19 Transporting Pets em ey eda 71 Tread W
269. ng TPM Telltale Light illu minates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion 286 STARTING AND OPERATING ME For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the TPM Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and
270. ng either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will
271. ngine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for L damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 382 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter J Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule mi mi mi O OC C C C Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the rear axle fluid Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code
272. nlock the Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es within five seconds to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter Refer to Re mote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC in Section 4 Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off Refer to Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock under Per sonal Settings Customer Programmable Features un der Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC
273. nspect and replace the PCV Valve if necessary J Inspect the rear axle fluid J Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes O O Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer mi mi mi O O O O C L Rotate tires If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 385 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule J Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L Rotate tires Q Replace the spark plugs J Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule M Change the engin
274. nt fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION SELECT button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset e Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position e Display Units of Measure in To make your selection press and release the FUNC TION SELECT button until ENGLISH or METRIC appears EEE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 To Reset The Display Performance Pages If Equipped Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button once to clear the resettable function being dis M f vehicl m ith the Perf played To reset all resettable functions press and rele
275. nter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Phonebook Cleared Enter Number New Entry Added 81c6bf80 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Setup Confirmation Towing p Emergency Toggle Pair List Phones New phone Select a language Confirmation will English Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais on off Say 4 digit System Lists override pin code Phones phone Select phone List Phones priorities Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing to be deleted System System Lists Phone Deleted confirms Phones All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language
276. nti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze solution Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Selection of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341 CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the speci fied engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine
277. o system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Recognition System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Recognition System VR in Section 3 Voice Recognition Button uconnect phone If m Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button uconnect phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the uconnect phone feature if equipped Refer to uconnect phone in Section 3 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With UConnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right
278. ode Press the Power Button 3 to turn ON the TIREFIT kit 2 Connect the Power Plug 5 to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle if avail able Make sure the engine is running before turning ON the TIREFIT kit 3 The Sealant Bottle 1 may be empty due to previous use Call for assistance NOTE If mode select knob 4 is on air mode and pump is operating air will dispense from black air pump hose 6 only not the clear sealant hose 7 If the sealant white fluid does flow through the clear Sealant Hose 7 1 Continue to operate pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose typically takes 30 70 seconds As the sealant flows through hose 7 the pressure gauge 2 can read as high as 70 psi 5 Bar The pressure gauge 2 will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi to the actual tire pressure when the sealant bottle is empty 312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME 2 The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi ately after the sealant bottle is empty Continue to operate pump and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver side latch pillar recom mended pressure Check the tire pressure by looking at the pressure gauge 2 If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi 1 8 Bar pressure within 15 minutes e The tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance If the tire in
279. om the ignition and lock your vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Power Door Lock Switch If you press the power door LOCK switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition and any front door is open the power locks will not operate This prevents you from E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle Remov ing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to operate If a door is open the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition is in the LOCK or ACC position a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 d The doors were not previously locked using the power oor lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter Automatic Door Locks Programming The Automatic Door Locks feature can be
280. omatically make the adjustment You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the OFF position on the fan control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake 72 F 22 C is the recommended setting for maximum comfort for the average person however this may vary NOTE The temperature setting can be adjusted at any time without affecting automatic operation Air conditioning in this system is automatic Pressing the air conditioning control button while in AUTO mode will cause the indicator in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and request ing the air conditioning is not necessary The system will automatically control recircu lation However pressing the recirculation con trol button will temporarily put the system in Recirculation mode 10 minutes This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recircula tion will cause the indicator in the control button to ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 illuminate After 10 minutes the system will return to normal AUTO mode function and the indicator will turn off NOTE e The surface of the climate control panel and the top center of the instrument panel should be kept free of debris due to the location of the climate control sensors Mud on the winds
281. on 9 of this manual room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instru ment panel Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ge Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC air bags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but t
282. on ings System Status Personal Settings and Surround Sound if equipped Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept a selection The FUNCTION SE Audio mode display LECT button also functions as a remote FUNCTION Sound system control Refer to Remote SELECT Sound System Controls in this section Button Outside temperature display uconnect phone displays if equipped uconnect gps screens if equipped Surround Sound modes if equipped with Driver Selectable Surround DSS Performance Pages if equipped 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se A v SCROLL Button Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip Functions Performance Pages if equipped uconnect gps if equipped System Status Messages and Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features The SCROLL button also functions as a remote sound system con trol Refer to Remote Sound System Controls in this section D AUDIO MODE Button Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the Compass Temp Audio screen Along with compass reading and outside temperature this screen will display radio and media mode information depending on which ra dio is in the vehicle Refer to Remote Sound System Controls in this section Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle
283. onds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles km The odometer must be in TRIP mode to reset it 3 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed 4 Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light This light will turn on when the electronic O speed control is ON 5 Tachometer The red segments indicate the maximum permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red area 6 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should turn on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or turns on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices i e radio or slightly increase engine speed if at idle If the light remains on it means that the charging system is experiencing a problem See an autho rized dealer to obtain service immediately If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in section 6 of this manual 7 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light light will also turn on while the engine is This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check when the ignition switch is turned ON This running if there is a problem with the Elec tronic Throttle Control ETC system If the light comes on while the engine is running safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible place the shift
284. oners a deployed airbag and or pretensioner must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will con tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee BeltAlert Programming The BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following proce dure NOTE Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend de activating the BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not start the engine Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step NOTE You must perform the following steps within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position 3 Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch
285. ontinue recording System Setup To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you SA DEE oer See may say the following commands Play Memos to play previously recorded memos During the playback you may press the button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of Language Dutch mm the following commands e Language German e Language Italian Repeat to repeat a memo e Language English Next to play the next memo e Language French Previous to play the previous memo e Language Spanish Delete to delete a memo e Tutorial Delete All to delete all memos e Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the 4 button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers uconnect phone Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the 4 button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by uconnect phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure
286. operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles 24 km then the only approved method of towing is with a flatbed truck Otherwise damage to the trans mission may result Continued MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E Engine Compartment 6 1L 323 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 330 lll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 324 Maintenance Free Battery 331 Loose Fuel Filler Cap ossis ce hr 324 Air Conditioner Maintenance 333 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance A C Air Filter osa dong ex ben 334 Programs o 8G 4 ned g b d e 325 M Body Lubrication 000 335 7 M Replacement Parts 000 326 Windshield Wiper Blades 335 W Dealer Service seesssse 326 Adding Washer Fluid iss 336 W Maintenance Procedures 327 i Exhaust System www ee 337 Engine Oil seien E ERAS n 328 Engine Oil Filter i i sees ggg SPORE SISSY uada iustaaian dude d 322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Brake System Automatic Transmission Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion ll Fuses Integrated Power Module Rear Power Distribution Center li Vehicle Storage lll Replacement Bulbs ll Bulb Replacement Low Beam Headlamp High Beam H
287. optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly terrain travel ing into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick mode and select the 3 range Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures During cold temperature operation you may notice delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts the transmission is most likely operating in the Limp Home Mode In this mode the transmission will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is ee STARTING AND OPERATING 249 brought to a stop After the vehicle has stopped PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to operate Sec ond gear will operate in the DRIVE position The Mal function Indicator Light MIL may be illuminated A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service To reset the transmission use the following procedu
288. orages have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle All three rear seating positions have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should NEVER install LATCH compat ible child seats so that two seats share a common lower anchorage If installing child seats in adjacent rear seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using the vehi cle s seat belts ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 1 812652 LATCH Anchorages Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer s directions carefully when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system meets the seatback and are just visible when e you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it 4 In addition there are tether strap anchorages
289. our vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner e If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed e If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a cle
290. pholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side by side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants elbows Front Seat Cupholders The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the center console ll 07109 Rear Seat Cupholders Front Seat Cupholders 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M STORAGE Console Features The center console contains two shift bezel cubby bins with rubber mats for holding small items For vehicles not equipped with navigation radio the console also contains an extra storage bin located below the climate control which holds up to four CD jewel cases Two separate storage compartments are also located underneath the armrest 1 Release button for bottom compartment 2 Release button for top compartment 3 Top Compartment 4 Bottom Compartment You can access this compartment directly without first exposing the upper compartment by oper ating the Release Button for the bottom compartment with the armrest down ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 The top compartment holds small items such as a pen and note pad while the larger bottom compartment will hold CDs and alike The bottom compartment also con tains a 12 Volt power outlet and a molded in coin holder designed to hold various si
291. press the SCAN button again During Scan mode you can also press the SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to select the previous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON List Or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below takes you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclock wise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME bottom of the list just turn the wheel backwards counter clockwise to get to the track faster In List mode the radio PRESET Buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the
292. ps and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 85EATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm WARNING e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing child restraint should only be used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it The restraint mu
293. r approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 23 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light S This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 If th
294. r you must repeat one of the previously described arming sequences To Disarm the System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm e The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry Pressing the TRUNK button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound e When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed the interior power door lock switches will not unlock the doors The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has oc curred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash the horn will sound and the ignition will not start the vehicle If this occ
295. r allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to information on Child Restraints in this section You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoul der belts properly E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 WARNING The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have Do not lean against the door If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door airbags If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer panel during front airbag deployment could cause Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need serious injury including death Airbags need Assistance in Secti
296. rage then move it up or down to the position that fits you best As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger s
297. rammed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device i e garage door opener gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Place the ignition in the RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button for 20 seconds until the EVIC display states CHANNEL TRAINING Do not release the button 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the EVIC message states CHANNELS CLEARED Note that all channels will be erased Indi vidual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the training for rolling code Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you are having any
298. re Stop the vehicle Move the shift lever into the PARK position Turn OFF the engine Wait approximately 10 seconds oT A Cc N me Restart the engine 6 Move the shift lever to the desired range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible If the problem has been momentary the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears AUTOSTICK Autostick is a driver interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of the vehicle Autostick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations 250 STARTING AND OPERATING EE Operation By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears Moving the shift lever to the left triggers a downshift and to the right an upshift The gear po
299. re the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coolant antifreeze changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343 Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it
300. removed Towing with the rear wheels on the ground e Refer to the Tire Placard for your vehicle s proper while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe tire pressure transmission damage TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended 5 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS E Hazard Warning Flasher oe we E if Your Engine Overheats W TIREFIT Kit we TIREFIT Storage qeduex mci ran aes TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation TIREFIT Usage Precautions Sealing a Tire With TIREFIT E Jump Starting Procedures 304 304 305 306 306 307 Mi Freeing A Stuck Vehicle Bl Towing A Disabled Vehicle Without The Ignition Key Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehiclgzs c co hause sU a ES Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly 304 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the switch bank near the top center of the instrument panel A flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning This is an emergency warning system and it should not b
301. ress the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The uconnect phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone uconnect phone automati cally downloads your cellular phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone uconnect phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the cellular phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this
302. ress the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting uconnect studios Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions u
303. return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing assistance new entry transfer call no uconnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous record again redial es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received in cluding interference that may cause undesired operation VOICE RECOGNITION VR SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition VR System Operation e This Voice Recognition system allows you to control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone u
304. rking lights or the low beam headlights and press the headlight switch To turn off the front fog lights either press headlight switch again or turn off the headlight switch An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the fog lights are turned on NOTE The fog lights will operate with the low beam headlights or parking lights on However selecting the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals headlight beam selection and passing lights The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 NOTE e If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective e A Turn Signal On message will appear in the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and a con tinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi 1 6 km with either turn signal on 0315072677 ane Change Assist Multifunction Lever Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond Turn Signals the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows three times then automatically turn off on each side of the instrument cluster
305. rning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you E After Securing TIREFIT Sealant in the Tire Follow Step A Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT before continuing 1 Turn the Mode Select knob 4 to the Air Mode position 2 Uncoil the Black Air Pump Hose 6 and connect it to the valve stem 3 Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure Gauge 2 If tire pressure is less than 19 psi 1 3 Bar the tire is too badly damaged Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further Call for assistance If the tire pressure is 19 psi 1 3 bar or higher 1 Press the power button 3 to on and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading informa tion label on the driver side door opening 2 Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem and then reinstall the cap on the valve stem 314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE 3 Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the vehicle 4 Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire ser vice center 5 Replace the Sealant Bottle 1 and Sealant Hose 7 assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to F Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement NOTE When having the tire serviced advise the autho rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed using the TIREFIT service kit F Sealant Bottle and
306. rument panel light operation Rotate x The headlight switch is located on the left side of the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight park light and instrument panel light operation ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Automatic Headlights If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels To turn the system on rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A AUTO position When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch OFF To turn the automatic system off move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the automatic mode Headlights On with Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Headlights On with Wipers under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features under Electronic Vehicle Information Center in Section 4 Headlight Time Delay This feature provides the safet
307. rysler Group LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler Group LLC such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash re searchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC regardless of initiative the com pany or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the U S govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database
308. s Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 21 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 22 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided l should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
309. s Strong odors cannot be totally filtered out Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Section 7 for filter replacement instructions 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS zi and turn on A C Set the Fan control to the High position full clockwise VERY HOT Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is flushed from the vehicle w set the Mode control to Recirculate c amp 3 with A C on and roll up the windows Qi Once you are comfortable set the Mode control to Panel or Bi Level i po oa with A C on WARM WEATHER If it s sunny set the Mode control to Panel 7 and turn on A C If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control to Bi Level with A C on Adjust Temperature control for comfort COOL OR COLD Set the Mode control to Defrost Floor amp or Defrost Sg HUMID CONDITIONS Set the Fan Control to the High position full clockwise Adjust Fan and b 64 Temperature control for comfort if windows are clear 6 6 b COLD DRY Set the Mode control to Floor A If it s sunny you may want more upper air CONDITIONS In this case set the Mode control to Bi Level 4 In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode
310. s This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the power sunroof switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button in the center of the power sunroof switch and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent which oper ates regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the power sunroof switch will stop the sunroof N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 60
311. s possible and then retighten after driving about mile 0 8 km Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps especially with a loaded vehicle Use on rear wheels only Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave ment Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instructions on the method of installation operating speed and conditions for use Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the chain manufac turer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacturer NOTE In order to avoid damage to tires chains and your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement Observe the tire chain manufacturer s instruc tions on method of installation operating speed and conditions for usage ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer sug gest a maximum speed This notice applies to all chain traction devices including link and cable radial chains SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four Failure to do so may adversely
312. s 24400 c stanu te CEYY er S eR 32 Goat BAs And Popat Wonen onconcn 47 POISE AMOS cer Aaa a E Re Seat Belt Extender sss 47 Wind B ffeting cesses eer Re Ran 35 E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Supplemental Restraint System SRS MSafety Tips os rem mmy 72 dx QI EL B Transporting Passengers ee ee ee 72 flag DOPIN PENSO AU CONOS siat Exhaust Gas o Leo HRE e EE 73 LEN Event Data Recorder EDR 60 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Child Restraints 0 00004 62 Melucl ccacc sen tina castings Age i oa ga es 74 Bl Engine Break In Recommendations 71 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle o eau runa cae a ees 75 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three with detents and one that is spring loaded The detent posi tions are LOCK ACC and ON The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When re leased from the START position the switch automatically returns to the ON position Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similar to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three with detents and one that is spring loaded The detent posi tions are LOCK ACC and ON The
313. s displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zon
314. s in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System to perform the following functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically If a Deployment Occurs The airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the floor They are not caused by contact with ch
315. s that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327 your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES any procedure yourself The pages that follow contain the required maint
316. safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued 276 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be che
317. safety of others The ESP system has three available operating modes ESP On This is the normal operating mode for the ESP Whenever the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving situations The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs Partial Off The Partial Off mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired It is also intended for driving in deep snow sand or gravel This mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the threshold for ESP activation which allows for more wheel spin than what ESP normally allows The ESP OFF switch is located in the switch bank near the top center of the instrument panel To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESP OFF 200 STARTING AND OPERATING ME switch and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illumi nate To turn the ESP ON again momentarily press the ESP OFF switch and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will turn off NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn the ESP ON again by momen tarily pressing the ESP OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion
318. se All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death When you press the button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the e button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first avai
319. second detent past the intermittent settings for high speed wiper operation CAUTION Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the wind shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any position other than off Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Rotate the end of the multifunc tion lever to the first detent position and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are six delay settings which allow you to regulate the ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds between cycles WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use Mist Feature Push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever Windshield Washers To use the washer push the multifunction lever inward toward the steering column to the s
320. sed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil and refrigerants A C Air Filter The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger side of the vehicle next to the windshield wipers When installing a new filter ensure its proper orientation To replace the filter remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing the retaining clips Slide the lid on the filter adapter forward and down and remove the used ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335 filter Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the direction of airflow which is toward the rear of the vehicle text and arrows on the filter indicate this Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the applicatio
321. sition will display in the instrument cluster on the transmission range indicator NOTE e In Autostick mode the transmission will shift up and down when the driver manually moves the shift lever right D or left D e An UPSHIFT message will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC portion of the in strument cluster when using Autostick This message appears in order to alert the driver to upshift to the next gear The UPSHIFT message will display while operating the vehicle at higher engine revolutions per minute RPM You can shift in or out of the Autostick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal When you wish to engage Autostick simply move the shift lever to the right D or left D while in the DRIVE position The transmission will remain in the current gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen When you wish to disengage Autostick hold the shift lever to the right for at least one second The transmission will now operate automatically shifting between the five available gears General Information e You can start out in first or second gear The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed e The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop E STARTING AND OPERATING 251 WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear e St
322. sm Lubrication 335 B Pillar Location ccc emegi 271 Brake Assist System areae u a eee 261 Brake Control System Electronic 260 Brake Eli dll is odes tales oo sens os br ein 372 Brake Parking llle 256 Brake System sos auone 0 000000 ee eee 257 344 Anti Lock ABS cerides depne aiana 258 261 Fluid Check ians seo tepheso ge nE S 345 372 Master Cylinder 0 0 0 0 0 00s eee 345 Parking iut E eat ney baie ian eens 256 Warning Light 22e e Ree 169 258 Brakes s gu Eee t des Rr Ribes dep Es 257 344 404 INDEX as Brake Transmission Interlock 244 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 71 Brightness Interior Lights 131 Bulb Replacement 200 361 362 Bulbs Light cz Pate vx I 75 361 Calibration Compass sees 185 Capacities Fluid 0 0 0 0 00 cae 370 Caps Filler Fuel 22 usob ea PEOR Edie Baw ng dodo 296 Oi Engine ee bere coe hem ed one ss 329 Power Steering cesse eee 255 Radiator Coolant Pressure 342 Car Washes oscoro coapta pre ea nea i 349 Carbon Monoxide Warning 73 296 Cargo Vehicle Loading sies 298 Cellular Phone llle 85227 Certification Label llle 299 Chains Titres s se iun ERR e ex 281 Chart Tite Sizing cer rex en ds 268 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 325 Checking
323. soon to work properly with the uconnect phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your uconnect phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the uconnect phone When calling a number with your uconnect phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the 4 button and say
324. st be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anch
325. stability and control in various driving conditions ee STARTING AND OPERATING 261 Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau lic brake pressure This prevents wheel lock up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking For more information about ABS refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Section 5 WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those result ing from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe atten tive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each driven wheel If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability Brake Assist System BAS This system complements the ABS by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake appli
326. stop parking brake Always apply parking brake fully NEUTRAL when parked to guard against vehicle movementand This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro possible mjury or Han ane longed periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position e When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the CAUTION way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmission damage e Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument panel to ensure it is in the PARK position CAUTION Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is moved out of PARK before the ignition switch is turned from the LOCK to the ON position 248 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident DRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth gear The DRIVE position provides
327. t expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Key Fob Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 328 ft 100 m NOTE e The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start 2 e Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may reduce this range How to Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed e Hood closed e Trunk closed e Hazard switch off e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed e Ignition key removed from ignition switch e Battery at an acceptable charge level e RKE PANIC button not pressed 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses NOTE WARNING e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during e Do not start or run an engine i
328. te ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 MPEG Specification Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user
329. teering column pull the control handle outward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position push the control handle inward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving The telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv ing Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or driving without the telescoping adjustment locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle ADJUSTABLE PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position This feature allows both the brake and accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel The switch is located on the front side of the driver s seat cushion side shield Adjustable Pedals Switch Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward toward the front of the vehicle Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward toward the driver e The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e The pedals can be adjusted while driving ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL e The pedals cannot be adjusted whe
330. th the ra dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 The uconnect phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the uconnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any uconnect phone features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The uconnect phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the uconnect phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the uconnect phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect phone and to navigate through the uconnect phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most uconnect phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone
331. the beginning other side is a CD should not be used and they of the current selection or return to the beginning of the A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF can cause damage to the player previous selection if the CD is within the first second of mu the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK EJECT Button Ejecting a CD button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in Press the EJECT button to eject the CD CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric
332. the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also ee STARTING AND OPERATING 263 flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those result ing from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe at tentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the
333. the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Exhaust Gas under Safety Tips in Section 2 CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine 338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced prompt
334. ther turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch Dimmer Control The dimmer control is part of the head light switch and is located on the left side of the instrument panel With the parking lights or headlights on rotat ing the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instru ment panel lights and if equipped the lighting in the door map pockets and cupholders Dome Light Position Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent to turn on the interior lights The interior lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this position Interior Light Defeat OFF Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF position The interior lights will remain off when the doors are open Parade Mode Daytime Brightness Feature Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent This feature brightens all text displays such as the odometer Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers and washer when the ignition switch is in the ON position The lever is located on the left side of the steering column 031507267 Windshield Wiper Washer Control Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper operation or to the
335. tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as
336. to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the uconnect phone e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e You can also press the 4 button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the uconnect phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete uconnect phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing Atthe next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the m button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your uconnect phone uconnect phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the X button and say uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the uconnect phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this
337. to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant antifreeze level is adequate With the engine OFF and cold the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be be tween the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator 344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be saf
338. to the ON position unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to retract the seat belt 4 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position A single chime will sound to signify that you have success fully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver s seat belt is unbuckled ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if so equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt
339. to you your passengers and others around you Continued through the skin It causes skin eye and respira tory irritation Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin Change clothing as soon as possible if there is any contact with clothing TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex In case of allergic reaction or rash consult a physician im mediately Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children If swallowed rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water Do not induce vomiting Consult a physician immedi ately Use the gloves provided in the Accessory Storage Compartment 8 when operating the TIREFIT kit 310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE Sealing a Tire with TIREFIT A Whenever You Stop to Use TIREFIT 1 Pull over to a safe location and turn ON the vehicle s Hazard Warning flashers 2 Verify that the valve stem on the wheel with the deflated tire is in a position that is near to the ground This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses 6 and 7 to reach the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding 3 Place the transmission in PARK auto transmission or in Gear manual transmission and turn OFF the ignition 4 Set the parking bra
340. tomatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 of this manual en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the Key Fob in the ignition 2 Cydle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position do not start engine 3 Depress the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Usethe Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or alike into the child lock control and pull it upward 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es NOTE For emergency key information refer to A Word About Your Keys in this
341. try Foreign Language Language Information Inform Jazz Jazz News News Nostalgia Nostalga Oldies Oldies Personality Persnlty Program Type 16 Digit Character Display Public Public Rhythm and Blues R amp B Religious Music Rel Musc Religious Talk Rel Talk Rock Rock Soft Soft Soft Rock Soft Rck Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Sports Sports Talk Talk Top 40 Top 40 Weather Weather By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you ar
342. ts unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses Key Fob with factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle After placing the ignition switch in the RUN position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics This condition will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEF
343. uconnect phone will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial by Saying a Number Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 234 567 8901 The uconnect phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Call by Saying a Name Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook The uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the uconnect phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion P
344. un mute the uconnect phone e Press the WS button e Following the beep say Mute off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The uconnect phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your uconnect phone paired cellular phone to the uconnect phone or vice versa press the button and say Iransfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the uconnect phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a uconnect phone paired cellular phone and the uconnect phone follow the instructions described in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The uconnect phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the WS button and say Se lect or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way
345. up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 WARNING WARNING Continued e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your s
346. up LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 395 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner
347. updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to en STARTING AND OPERATING 289 be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning 7 ji If a system fault is detected the TPM Telltale Light will Tire Poly flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid m i The system fault will also sound a chime In addition the AE rant EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for nn ix three seconds and then display dashes in place of the i msasa sume pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received 81979401 290 STARTING AND OPERATING EE If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the TPM Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 3 Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire ch
348. urs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence the horn will sound three times when you disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or unlock any door E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON from the LOCK position NOTE e None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer control is in the defeat position extreme downward position unless the overhead map reading lights are turned on manually REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from dis tances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter however the buttons on the remaining RKE transmitters will continue to work Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters 021307469 Key Fob with RKE Transmitter To U
349. us radio me FUNCTION dia and Universal Customer Interface SELECT UCI functions i e advance presets select Button next folder jump to or start playing songs in playlists etc depending on which radio is in the vehicle and if equipped with UCI When the EVIC is in the Compass Temp A Audio screen press the SCROLL button to v seek up and down radio stations tracks SCROLL Chapters files etc depending on which Button radio is in the vehicle CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Automatic Temperature Control Under certain conditions the cellular phone
350. ust be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer Anti Lock Brake Light The Anti Lock Brake Light monitors the anti lock brake system The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the Anti Lock Brake Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on If the Anti Lock Brake Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the Anti Lock Brake Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the Anti Lock Brake Light remain on the ABS and EBD systems are not functioning Immediate repair to the ABS system is required ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system commonly referred to as ESP This system includes the Anti Lock Brake System ABS the Traction Control System TCS the Brake Assist System BAS and the Electronic Stability Program ESP These systems work together to enhance both vehicle
351. ve load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 402 INDEX BEEN About Your Brakes iaeia 256 257 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 258 261 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 341 Adding F el siw egei mre iem gars ave ws 296 Adding Washer Fluid 004 336 Additives Fuel lees 294 Adjastable Pedals gs 2 886 34 04 xe RS 135 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 330 Air Conditioner Maintenance 333 Air Conditioning Filter iiis 233 334 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 234 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 333 334 Air Conditioning System 227 333 Air Pressure Tires llle 276 Airbag xixssawederidegetexe Bras wo er es 48 56 Airbag Deployment llle 57 Airbag Light 49 55 60 74 166 Airbag Maintenances sede nk ees 59 Airbag SIde uus Pubs aW RES EN 54 56 Airbag Window Side Curtain 50 54 56 Alarm Panic lees 21 Alarm Security Alarm 17 171 Alarm System Security Alarm 17 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio cess 220 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 340 341 370 Disposal xis ees Gren og ine SERE igs ons 343 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 258 261 Anti Lock Warning Light 172
352. y Defects Reporting 396 Safety Exhaust Gas 6 eee 73 Safety Information Tire 267 Safety Tips ee eos eee E es Se aS Satellite Radio Antenna 416 INDEX BEEN Satellite Radio uconnect studios 219 Schedule Maintenance sess 374 Seat Belt Maintenance llle 353 Seat Belt Reminder less 45 Seat Belts 23er ERAS S 37 38 74 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 43 And Pregnant Women 0006 47 Child Restraint 0005 62 63 64 69 Extendet 222349 p RD RC EU dh Ae a Ew 47 Front Seat eee 38 39 Inspection ues ueterem dene ER 74 Operating Instructions 39 PretenSlOners iw Eae ew oe bee ae kis 45 RearS at sonc rraren ch ios he doa eae s 38 Reminder ss 4 33 6544 00 84 dachaaw ee 3E 168 Untwisting Procedure 0 44 SedlS Ge ia eas hen ew NONAS Re ee BR ae 118 Adj stmert res ese eb He dee 118 Head Restraints llle 121 Heated 22s se eR ge ES aoe 123 Height Adjustment setea eR a 119 Lumbar Support 22 4 22s oss ee a m 120 POWEP cse dtu eens d PE AEN MUSAE E Od 119 Rear Folding 4s kke m ERR 124 Reclit ng 5 ce Satin SMe nae dese eT Ud dee dies 120 Seatback Release 0000040 124 THINS szeciesstrekeibeUeb9w e du gens 119 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 171 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 340 371 Selection Of Oll i g
353. y and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER 040905837 EVIC The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea Electronic Vehicle Information Center tures a driver interactive display that is located in the This system conveniently allows the driver to select a instrument cluster variety of useful information by pressing the switches mounted on the steering wheel The EVIC consists of the following e System status UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 Vehicle information warning message displays The system allows the driver to select information by Tire Pressure Monitor System En the following buttons mounted on the steering Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Press and r l ase the MENU bottenanddhie Compass display mode displayed will change between Trip Functions Performance Pages if equipped MENU _ uconnect gps if equipped System Warn Trip computer functions Butt
354. y of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds programmable when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area To activate the delay feature turn OFF the ignition switch while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when the headlight switch is turned off If you turn the headlights park lights or ignition switch ON again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature The Headlight delay time is programmable Refer to Delay Turning Headlights Off under Personal Set tings Customer Programmable Features under Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in Section 4 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is ON the headlights are off and the parking brake is off The headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights O The front fog light switch is built into the head light switch To activate the front fog lights turn on the pa
355. ze coins A slot in the left and right side of the top compartment provides clearance for power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the lid closed This feature is ideal for games laptop s cellular phones or other electrical equipment The con sole s front opening lid allows for easy access to these compartments Cargo Area Vehicles Equipped with 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When the seats are folded down they provide a continuous nearly flat extension of the load floor When the seatback is folded to the upright position make sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down position should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in an accident Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system Continued 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Cont
356. zed Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 378 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter T Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter 3 If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner J Rotate tires filter and replace if necessary T Inspect the rear axle fluid Replace the air conditioning filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary O O O O C M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 379 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires J Replace the engine air cleaner filter J Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Odometer Reading D
357. zed dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid 256 STARTING AND OPERATING EE If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the correct fluid type PARKING BRAKE The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha nism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill

2010 Dodge Charger SRT8 Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents